21. The Agency will assume responsibility for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of existing main or trunkline utility facilities within the area affected by the Work if such utilities are not identified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for any delay caused by failure of Agency to provide for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of such existing facilities.
22. The Contractor will be compensated for damages incurred due to delays for which the Agency is responsible or for delays attributable to interferences, relocations, or alterations not covered by the Contract Documents. These damages for delay will be determined by the Engineer. The Agency shall not be liable for damages which could have been avoided by the judicious handling of forces, equipment, or plant. These avoidable damages will be determined by the Engineer. The Engineer may grant Contractor an extension of time for damages due to delay.
23. When necessary, the Contractor shall so conduct its operations as to permit access to the Work Site and provide time for utility work to be accomplished during the progress of the Work.
4-3 INSPECTION
4-3.1 General
ADD the following:
1. All costs of inspection at the source, including salaries and mileage costs, shall be paid by the Contractor.
2. Materials typically accepted by Certificate of Compliance shall not require inspection at the source unless specified in the Contract Documents. F or a list of these items or materials, Contractor may refer to the Summary of Work.
3. Location changes to the source of materials requiring inspection without the required 24 - hour notification may result in non -compliant material subject to rejection. Contractor shall be responsible for staff charges resulting from last minute changes or cancellations once staff has been deployed. The Engineer shall issue a deductive Field Order for a minimum of 2 hours of staff time to reimburse the Agency for misdirected staff charges. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the additional staff charges incurred.
4. Agency staff or a qualified inspection agency approved by the Engineer shall witness all welding, lining, coating, and testing. Contractor shall incur additional inspection costs outlined in 4-2.3, “Inspection of Items Not Locally Produced.”
5. All parts of production (including but not limited to product fabrication, welding, testing, lining, and coating of straight pieces and specials) shall be performed or pro duced in the United States.
6. Welding and all testing shall be performed by certified welders and testing staff with credentials traceable in the United States.
7. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer free and safe access to any and all parts of Work at any time. Such free and safe access shall include means of safe access and egress, ventilation, lighting, shoring, dewatering and all elements pertaining to the safety of persons as contained in the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders and such other safety regulations ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
as may apply. Contractor shall furnish Engineer with such information as may be necessary to keep the Engineer fully informed regarding progress and manner of work and character of materials. Inspection or testing of the whole or any portion of the Work or materials incorporated in the Work shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation to fulfill this Contract.
4-3.3 Inspection of Items Not Locally Produced
ADD the following:
1. The Engineer may elect Agency staff or Consultants to perform inspection of an out-of-town manufacturers. The Contractor shall incur additional inspection costs of the Engineer including lodging, meals, and incide ntal expenses based on Federal Per Diem Rates, along with travel and car rental expenses. If the manufacturing plant operates a double shift, a double shift shall be figured in the inspection costs.
a. At the option of the Engineer, full time inspection shall continue for the length of the manufacturing period. If the manufacturing period will exceed 3 consecutive weeks, Contractor shall incur additional inspection expenses of the Engineer’s supervisor for a trip of 2 Working Days to the site per month.
b. When the Engineer elects Agency staff or Consultants to perform out- of-town inspections, the wages of staff employed by the Agency shall not be part of the additional inspection expenses paid by Contractor.
c. Federal Per Diem Rates can be determined at the locatio n below:
https://www.gsa.gov/portal/content/104877
2. Specialty Testing of Foreign Materials.
a. Materials that are manufactured, produced, or fabricated outside of the United States shall be delivered to a distribution point in California, unless otherwise specified.
Quality Control and related testing shall be performed to all applicable specified U S standards. Manufacturer’s testing and staff certification shall be traceable to a United States regulatory agency. Retain the materials for a sufficient period of time to permit inspection, sampling, and testing. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time for acts or events occurring outside of, at point of entry, or during transport to the United States, unless the extension is acceptable to the Engineer.
ADD 4-3.4 Specialty Inspection Paid for by the Contractor
1. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified inspection agency to perform specialty inspection services as required by the Contract Documents.
2. The payment for the specialty inspection service Work shall be included under the Bid item for “Specialty Inspection Paid For By the Contractor.”
3. When an Allowance Bid item for “Specialty Testing Under the Direction of the Engineer” is provided, Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified third party independent laboratory to perform the required tes ting. Contractor shall be reimbursed for the cost of testing under this Bid item.
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
4. Contractor shall be reimbursed for the cost of specialty inspections when an Allowance Bid item is included in the Bid otherwise the cost is the responsibility of the Contrac tor if the manufacturer requires a specialty inspection service.
4-4 TESTING
ADD the following:
1. Except as specified in these Special Provisions, the Agency will bear the cost of testing of locally produced materials and/or on-site workmanship where the results of such tests meet or exceed the requirements indicated in the Standard Specifications, Technical Specification, and any Supplemental Provisions. The cost of all other tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
2. At the option of the Engineer, the source of supply of each of the materials shall be approved by the Engineer before the delivery is started. All materials proposed for use may be inspected or tested at any time during their preparation and use. If, after incorporating such materials into the Work, it is found that sources of supply that have been approved do not furnish a uniform product, or if the product from any source proves unacceptable at any time, the Contractor shall furnish approved material from other approved sources. If any product proves unacceptable after improper storage, handling or for any other reason it shall be rejected, not incorporated into the Work and shall be removed from the Project Site all at the Contractor’s expense.
3. Compaction tests may be made by the Engineer and all costs for tests that meet or exceed the requirements of the specifications shall be borne by the Agency. The tests may be made at any place along the Work as deemed necessary by the Engineer. The costs o f any retests made necessary by noncompliance with the specifications shall be borne by the Contractor. 4-6 TRADE NAMES
ADD the following:
1. Whenever materials or equipment are indicated in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular s upplier, the naming of the item is intended to establish the type, function, and quality required.
2. Unless stated otherwise, materials or equipment of other s uppliers may be accepted if sufficient information is submitted to the Engineer for review to determine whether the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that named.
3. For reviews prior to Bid:
a. If the Engineer fails to respond to Contractor’s substitution proposal before the Bid due date, the substitution proposal shall be deemed denied. b. Contractor may bring forward a substitution proposal after Award that was denied based on the Engineer’s failure to respond by submitting a Cost Reduction Proposal in accordance with 2-6.1, “Cost Reduction Proposal.”
4. Include the following information in the request for substitution:
a. Whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work shall require a change in any of the Contract Documents to adopt the design to the proposed substitute. b. Whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the Work is subject to the payment of any license fee or royalty.
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
c. All variations of the proposed su bstitute from the items originally specified shall be identified.
d. Available maintenance, repair, and replacement service requirements. The manufacturer shall have a local service agency within 50 miles (80.5 km) of the S ite which maintains properly trained personnel and adequate spare parts and is able to respond and complete repairs within 24 hours.
e. Certifications from the manufacturer or service provider that the proposed substitute shall perform the intended function adequately under the expected service conditions, achieve the results called for by the general design, and be similar and of equal substance to that indicated.
5. There is no guaranteed time frame for the Engineer’s review of the substitution requests. Any lack of action on the Engineer’s side within Contractor’s requested time does not constitute acceptance of the substitution.
6. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, substitute items are determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, appearance, durability, compatibility with existing equipment or systems, availability of repair parts and suitability of application, the Contractor shall remove the substituted item and replace it with the originally specified item at no cost to the Agency.
7. The burden of proof as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitute product, material or equipment shall be upon Contractor. The Engineer may require at Contractor’s expense additional data about the proposed substitute.
8. Acceptance by the Engineer of a substitute item does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents. If the Engineer takes no exceptions to the proposed substitution, it shall not relieve Contractor from Contractor’s responsibility to the efficiency, sufficiency, quality, and performance of the substitute material or equipment in the same manner and degree as the material and equipment specified by name.
9. The Bid submittal shall be based on the material and equipment specified by name in the Contract. If the proposal is rejected by the Engineer, Contractor shall not be entitled to either an extension in Contract Time, an increase in the Contract Price, or both.
10. As applicable, no Shop Drawing or Working Drawing submittals shall be made for a substitute item nor shall any substitute item be order ed, installed, or utilized without the Engineer’s prior written approval.
11. The Contractor is responsible for the satisfactory performance of substituted items. If, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, the substitution is determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, appearance, durability, compatibility with associated items, availability of repair parts and suitability of application the Contractor shall remove the substituted item and replace it with the originally specified item at no cost to the Agency.
SECTION 5 – LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
5-1 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
ADD the following:
1. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the provisions of the Labor Code regarding minimum wages; the 8-hour day and 40-hour week; overtime; Saturday, Sunday, and holiday work; and ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
prohibitions against discrimination, harassment, and retaliation. The Contractor shall forfeit to the Agency the penalties prescribed in the Labor Code for violations.
2. Each worker shall be paid subsistence and travel as required by the collective bargaining agreement on file with the State of California Department of Industrial Relations.
3. The Contractor’s attention is directed to Labor Code Section 1776 which imposes responsibility upon the Contractor for the maintenance, certification, and availability for inspection of such records for all persons employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in connection with the Project. The Contractor shall agree through the Contract to comply with this Section and the remaining provisions of the Labor Code.
4. Municipal ordinances that affect this Work include Chapter 11.06. Excavation and Grading. If this notice specifies locations or possible materials, such as borrow pits or gravel beds, for use in the proposed construction Project which would be subject to Fish and Game Code Section 1601 or 1603, the conditions established in Fish and Game Code Section 1601 et seq. shall become conditions of the Contract.
5-3.3 Payroll Records.
ADD the following:
1. If requested by the Agency, the Contractor and its Subcontractors shall maintain and furnish to the Agency, at a designated time, a certified copy of each weekly payroll reflecting the wages containing all of Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ employees engaged in the Work and a statement of compliance signed under penalty of perjury. 5-3.4 Hours of Labor
ADD the following:
1. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the hours of work shall be between the hours of 7:00 AM and 4:00 PM on Mondays through Fridays, excluding Agency holidays.
The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer if the Contrac tor desires to work outside these hours or at any time during weekends and/or holidays. This written permission must be obtained at least 48 hours prior to such work. The Engineer may approve work outside the stated hours and/or days when, in his/her sole opinion, such work conducted by the Contractor is beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. The Contractor shall pay the inspection costs of such work.
2. The Contractor shall incorporate the dates, areas and types of work prohibited in this section in the Construction Schedule. No additional payment, adjustment of bid prices or adjustment of contract time of completion will be allowed as a consequence of the prohibition of work being performed within the dates, areas and/or types of work prohibited in this section. 5-4 INSURANCE
5-4.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Contract insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
with the performance of the Work by the Contractor, his or her agents, representatives, employees or Subcontractors. The insurance shall meet the City’s policy for insuranc e as stated in City Council Policy No. 70.
a. Coverages and Limits: Contractor shall maintain the types of coverages and minimum limits specified in these Agency Supplemental General Provisions (00 73 00):
i. Commercial General Liability (CGL) Insurance : Insura nce written on an “occurrence” basis, including products -completed operations, personal & advertising injury, with limits no less than $2,000,000 per occurrence. If a general aggregate limit applies, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit.
ii. Business Automobile Liability Insurance : $2,000,000 combined single limit per accident for bodily injury and property damage. In addition, the auto policy must cover any vehicle used in the performance of the Contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non -owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled.
iii. Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability Insurance : Workers’ compensation limits as required by the Labor Code and Employers’ Liability limits of $1,000,000 per incident. Workers’ compensation offered by the State Compensation Insurance Fund is acceptable to the City.
b. Additional Provisions: Contractor shall ensure that the policies of insurance required under this Contract with the exception of Workers’ Compensation and Business Automobile Liability Insurance contain, or are endorsed to contain, the following provisions.
i. The Agency, its officials, employees and volu nteers must be covered as additional insured as respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor; products and completed operations of the Contractor; premises owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the Contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Agency, its officials, employees or volunteers. All additional insured endorsements must be evidenced using separate documents attached to the certificate of insuranc e; 1 for each company affording general liability, and employers’ liability coverage.
ii. The Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the Agency, its officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self - insurance maintained by the Agency, its officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of the Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it.
iii. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to the Agency, its officials, employees or volunteers. iv. Coverage shall state that the Contractor’s insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer’s liability.
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
c. Notice of Cancellat ion. Each insurance policy required by this Contract shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be nonrenewed, suspended, voided, canceled, or reduced in coverage or limits except after 10 Calendar Days’ prior written notice has been sent to the Agency by certified mail, return receipt requested. d. Deductibles and Self -Insured Retention (S.I.R.) Levels. Any deductibles or self - insured retention levels must be declared to and approved by the Agency. At the option of the Agency, either: the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retention levels as respects the Agency, its officials and employees; or the Contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigation, claim administration and defense expenses. e. Waiver of Subrogation. All policies of insurance required under this Contract shall contain a waiver of all rights of subrogation the insurer may have or may acquire against the Agency or any of its officials or employees. f. Subcontractors. Contractor shall include all Subcontractors as insured under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each Subcontractor. Coverages for Subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated in these Agency Supplemental General Provisions (00 73 00). g. Acceptability of Insurers. Insurance must be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best’s Key Rating Guide of at least A -:VII. Insurers must also be authorized to transact the business of insurance by the State of Califor nia Insurance Commissioner as admitted carriers as evidenced by a listing in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California and/or under the standards specified by City Council Policy No. 70.
h. Verification of Coverage. C ontractor shall furnish the Agency with certificates of insurance and original endorsements affecting coverage required by this clause. The certificates and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be in forms approved by the Agency and are to be received and approved by the Agency before the Contract is executed by the Agency. i. Coverage and Limits . Contractor will maintain the types of coverage and minimum limits indicated below unless the Risk Manager or City Manager or Executive Manager approves a lower amount. These minimum amounts of coverage will not constitute any limitations or cap on Contractor’s indemnification obligations under this Contract.
Agency, its officers, agents, and employees make no representation that the limits of the insurance specified to be carried by Contractor pursuant to this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor. If Contractor believes that any req uired insurance coverage is inadequate, Contractor will obtain such additional insurance coverage, as Contractor deems adequate, at Contractor’s sole expense. The full limits available to the named insured shall also be available and applicable to the Agen cy as an additional insured.
j. Cost of Insurance. The Cost of all insurance required under this Contract shall be included in the Contractor’s Bid.
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
5-6 PATENTS FEES AND ROYALTIES.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. Contractor shall pay, at no additional cost to the Agency, all applicable royalties and license fees arising from the Work. Contractor shall indemnify and defend all claims and lawsuits for infringement of patent, trademark, and copyright against the Agency and shall hold the Agency harmless from any loss.
5-7 SAFETY
5-7.1.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. When conducting grading or excavation, place Contractor’s name and emergency telephone number adjacent to the Work at intervals and locations approved b y the Engineer. The method of posting shall be approved by the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall respond and initiate corrective action in accordance with OSHA and within 24 hours of the notice of the nonconforming Work that poses an imminent threat to person or property.
3. The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workers and public, and shall use danger signs warning against hazards created by such features of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, and falling materials.
ADD: 5-7.1.3 Health and Safety Plan (HSP).
1. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the health and safety of Contractor’s employees.
These specifications shall not be construed to limit Contractor’s liability nor to assume that the Agency, its employees, or designees shall assume any of Contractor’s liability associated with Site safety considerations.
2. Contractor shall have a HSP in effect at least 1 week prior to the commencement of the Work.
The HSP shall comply with all OSHA and other applicable requirements.
3. The HSP shall specifically address procedures and protocols that shall be followed to monitor for or respond to the presence of hazardous atmosphere, possibility for engulfment, gasses due to organic soils or proximity to landfills, exposure to hazardous products such as may be released when grinding, cutting, or torching galvanized or painted surfaces or asbestos containing materials, contaminated soil, and groundwater. Identify response actions that shall be taken when these conditions are encountered.
4. The Agency shall not assume any role in determining the adequacy of the HSP on Contractor’s behalf.
5-7.7 Security and Protective Devices.
5-7.7.1 General.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
1. Security and protective devices shall consist of fencing, railing, steel plates, or other devices for the protection of workers or the public from hazards posed by open excavations or any work in progress. Security and protective devices shall remain in place until the Work is accepted.
2. Unless otherwise specified, no separate or additional payment will be made for security and protective devices. Payment shall be included in the Contract price for the various Bid items requiring such devices.
ADD 5- 8 INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT
1. Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless Agency, its affiliated and subsidiary entities, and its elected and appointed officials, officers, directors, managers, employees and agents (“Indemnified Parties”) from and against all claims asserted, liability established, or judgments for damages or injuries to any person or property, including to Contractor’s officers, employees, agents, or subcontractors, arising directly or indirectly out of the Work, which arise from, are connected with, or are caused or claimed to be caused by the acts or omissions of Contractor, its officers, employees, agents or subcontractors.
Contractor’s duty to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless shall not include any claims or liabilities arising from the sole negligence or sole willful misconduct of the Indemnified Parties. Contractor further agrees that its duty to defend includes all attorney fees and costs associated with enforcement of this indemnification provision, defense of any claims arising from this Contract, and, where a conflict of interest exists or may exist between Contractor and Agency, the reasonable value of attorney fees an d costs if Agency chooses, at its own election, to conduct its own defense or participate in its own defense of any claim related to this Contract.
2. Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the Indemnified Parties against any challenges to the Award of the Contract to Contractor, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense costs for the Agency. Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for the Indemnified Parties, if the Indemnified Parties request separate counsel.
3. Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the Indemnified Parties against any challenges to the Award of the Contract to Contractor, arising in whole or in part from alleged inaccuracies or misrepresentation by the Contractor, whether intentional or otherwise, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense costs for the Agency. Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for the Indemnified Parties , if the Indemnified Parties request separate counsel.
4. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, protect and hold the Indemnified Parties harmless from and against any dispute between Contractor and Contractor’s Subcontractors if the Indemnified Parties are made a party to any judicial or administrative proceeding.
ADD 5- 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST
1. Establish and make known to Contractor’s employees appropriate safeguards to prohibit employees from using their positions for a purpose that is or gives the appearance of being ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
motivated by desire for private gain for themselves or others and particularly those with whom they have family, business, or other relationships. Project personnel shall not accept gratuities or any other favors from Subcontractors or potential Subcontractors.
2. Contractor is subject to all federal, state, and local conflict of interest laws, regulations, and policies applicable to public contracts and procurement practices (Government Code Sections 1090 et. seq. and 81000 et. seq., the Agency’s Ordinances, and the City of Carlsbad Municipal Code). If, in performing the Work, Contract or make s or participate s in a “governmental decision” in accordance with T itle 2, Section 18701, subdivision (a)(2) of the California Code of Regulations, or performs the same or substantially all the same duties for Agency that would otherwise be performed by an Agency employee holding a position specified in the Agency’s conflict of interest code, Contractor shall be subject to a conflict of interest code requiring t he completion of 1 or more statements of economic interests disclosing Contractor’s relevant financial interests.
3. Statements of economic interests shall be made on Fair Political Practices Commission Form 700 and filed with the City of Carlsbad’s City Clerk. Contractor shall file a Form 700 (Assuming Office Statement) within 30 Calendar Days of the Agency’s written determination that Contractor shall be subject to a conflict of interest code and f ile a Form 700 (Annual Statement) on or before April 1st disc losing any financial interests held during the previous calendar year for which Contractor was subject to a conflict of interest code.
4. If the Agency requires Contractor to file a statement of economic interests as a result of the Work performed, Contractor shall be considered a n “Agency Official” for conflict of interest purposes, including the prohibition against lobbying the Agency for 1 year following the expiration or termination of the Contract.
5. Contractor’s personnel employed on the Project shall not accept gratuities or any other favors from any Subcontractors or potential Subcontractors. Contractor shall not recommend or specify any product, supplier, or other Contractor with whom Contractor ha s a direct or indirect financial or organizational interest or relationship that would violate conflict of interest laws, regulations, or policies.
6. If Contractor violates any conflict of interest laws or any of these conflict of interest provisions, the violation shall be grounds for immediate termination of this Contract. Further, the violation subjects Contractor to liability to the Agency for all damages sustained as a result of the violation.
ADD 5- 10 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION
1. When specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall post all communication s addressed to the Engineer concerning construction including RFIs, submittals, daily logs, and transmittals to the Project management website established for the Project. The Contractor shall maintain a list of scheduled activities including planned and actual execution dates for all major construction activities and milestones defined in the approved Schedule. The Contractor shall review and act on all communications addressed to the Contractor in the Project management website. A user’s guide to the Project management system may be available on the City’s website and shall be provided to Contractor at the Pre -construction Meeting.
2. The payment for electronic communications shall be included in the Contract Price. ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
ADD 5- 11 STATUTORY REFERENCES
1. All references in these Agency Supplemental General Provisions (00 73 00) to any statute, rule or regulation are to the statute, rule or regulation as amended, modified, supplemented, or replaced from time to time by the corresponding legislative or regulatory body.
SECTION 6 – PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK ADD the following:
1. Payment for the creation and maintenance of the Construction Schedule shall be included in the Contract Price and no separate payment will be made, therefore. 6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK
ADD the following:
1. As soon as possible under the provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall start the Work.
2. When a Subcontractor fails to prosecute a portion of the Work in a manner satisfactory to the Agency, Contractor shall remove such Subcontractor immediately upon written request of the Agency, and shall request approval of a replacement Subcontractor to perform the Work in accordance with the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act (Pub. Contract Code, § 4100 et seq.) at no added cost to the Agency.
ADD 6- 2.1 Order of Work.
1. The Contractor shall incorporate the requirements of the c ity, utility companies or agencies having jurisdiction over the Work in accordance with 2 -4 Cooperation and Collateral Work, including any phasing requirements identified on the Plans or Special Provisions.
2. If construction and demolition operations are within an active public space, the Contractor shall submit a phasing plan to the Engineer to accommodate accessibility to the public and Agency staff. Phasing plan must be approved before Work starts. Phasing plan will be considered part of the mobilization Bid item and shall include any revisions or implementation of the Plan.
ADD 6- 2.2 Moratoriums.
1. When moratorium periods are specified in the Special Provisions, Contractor shall stop Work and completely demobilize all construction related activity, equipment, and materials within the stated limits prior to the beginning of the moratorium periods at no additional cost to the Agency. The Contractor shall complete any Work that has been started prior to the start of the moratorium.
2. Contractor shall restore and clean the Site prior to each moratorium. The Contractor shall not leave equipment, materials, or traffic control on the Site during the moratorium periods.
Trenches shall be backfilled during moratorium periods. Temporary resurfacing or steel plate covers over trenches shall not be used.
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
3. The payment for complying with moratorium requirements shall be included in the Contract Bid. Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional costs for repeated mobilization and demobilization to continue the Work after the moratorium periods. 6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION
6-3.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, the time of completion of the Contract shall be expressed in Working Days.
2. The number of Working Days specified for the walk-through, preparation, and the completion of Punchlist items until acceptance shall be included in the stipulated Contract Time.
3. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer to perform any Work outside of normal Work hours. This approval must b e obtained at least 48 hours prior to commencement of such Work. The Contractor shall pay any additional costs for inspection or testing of such Work.
4. The Contractor shall not perform Work during moratoriums per 6 -2.2 or during any periods of restriction identified in agency permits or Project environmental documents and shall include all such schedule constraints in the Construction Schedule.
5. No additional payment or adjustment of Bid item prices or adjustment of Contract Time will be made for the Contrac tor’s inability to work outside of normal Work hours if Contractor’s request is denied by the Engineer or during prohibited periods. 6-4 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
6-4.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. The Agency shall only grant an extension of time if the Extra Work or unforeseen condition impacts the Project’s critical path. All requests for an extension in Contract Time for any Extra Work or unforeseen event shall be demonstrated by using the CPM. No other scheduling method shall be used to calculate the Project’s schedule. 6-4.2 Extensions of Time.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. The Contract Time shall be modified only by Change Order.
2. Contractor shall immediately submit to the Agency a written request for a Change Order to modify the Contract Time, but in no event later than 1 Working Day after the occurrence and discovery of the events giving rise to the request. Contractor shall include in Contractor’s request a general description of the basis for and the estimated length of any extension and submit supporting data, including a time impact analysis setting forth the claimed Critical Path impacts to the Construction Schedule consistent with Section 1.14 (Change Orders, Delays, and Extensions of Time).
3. The Engineer shall not grant an extension of Contract Time unless Contractor demonstrates, through an analysis of the critical path, the following:
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
a. The event causing the delay impacted the activities along the Project’s critical path. b. The increases in the time to perform all or part of the Project beyond the Contract Time arose from unforeseeable causes beyond Contractor’s control and without Contractor’s fault or negligence.
c. All Project float has been used.
4. The Engineer shall issue a weekly document that stipulates the Contract Time. If Contractor does not agree with this documen t, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a written protest supporting Contractor’s objections to the document within 15 Working Days after receipt of the weekly document. Contractor’s failure to file a timely protest shall constitute Contractor’s acceptance of the Engineer’s weekly document. a. Contractor’s protest will be considered a claim for time extension and shall be subject to 2-10.1, “Claims.”
6-4.4 Written Notice and Report.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. Contractor’s failure to file with the Engineer a written request and report of cause within 24 hours will be considered grounds for refusal by the Agency to consider such request.
2. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer within 2 hours after the beginning of the delay, or when the Contractor has placed any workers or equipment on standby for any reason that the Contractor has determined to be caused by the Agency or by any organization that the Agency may otherwise be obligated by. The Contractor shall provide continuing daily written notice to the Engineer, each Working Day, throughout the duration of such period of delay. The initial and continuing written notices shall include the classification of each worker and supervisor and the make and model of all equipment placed on standby, the cumulative duration of the standby, the Contractor’s opinion of the cause of the delay and a cogent explanation of why the Contractor could not avoid the delay by reasonable means. Should the Contractor fail to provide the notice(s) required by this section the Contractor agrees that no delay has occurred and that it will not submit any claim(s) therefore.
3. The request for payment or extension must be made at least 15 Calendar Days prior to the specified completion date. Failure by the Contractor to provide notices and reports as specified in the Contract will be considered grounds for refusal by the Agency to consider such request.
6-7 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR DEFAULT
6-7.1 General.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. Prior to the Acceptance of the Work, Contractor shall be found in default of the Contract if:
a. Contractor becomes insolvent, assign Contractor’s assets for the benefit of Contractor’s creditors, are unable to pay Contractor’s debts as they become due, or are otherwise financially unable to complete the Work.
b. Contractor abandon s the Work by failing to report to the Site and by failing to diligently execute the Work to completion.
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
c. Contractor disregards written instru ction from the Engineer or materially violates provisions of the Contract Documents.
d. Contractor fails to execute the Work according to the Schedule approved by the Engineer.
e. Contractor disregards laws or regulations of any public body having jurisdiction. f. Contractor commits continuous or repeated violations of regulatory or statutory safety requirements.
g. Contractor fails to notify the Engineer upon discovery of items of Native American, Archaeological, or Paleontological interests.
2. Notices and other written communications regarding default between the Contractor, the Agency, and the Surety shall be transmitted in accordance with 5- 2, “SPECIAL NOTICES.” 6-8 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONVENIENCE.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. At any time, the Agency may at its sole discretion terminate this Contract in whole or in part.
If the Agency decides to terminate this Contract for convenience, the Agency shall issue a written notice of termination for convenience in accordan ce with 5 -2, “SPECIAL NOTICES .” Upon receipt of this notice, Contractor shall immediately proceed as follows:
a. Stop Work immediately or in accordance with the Notice of Termination. b. Notify Subcontractors and Suppliers to immediately cease their Work and place no further subcontracts for materials, services, or facilities except as necessary to complete any authorized continued portion of the Contract. c. Terminate all subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the Work terminated. d. With approval by the Engineer, settle all outstanding obligations arising from the termination of subcontracts. This approval shall be final for the purposes of this section.
e. As directed by the Engineer, transfer and deliver completed or partially completed drawings, plans, calculations, specifications, and any other documents and records that, if the Contract had been completed, would be required to be furnished to the Agency.
f. Complete the performance of the Work not terminated. g. Take all necessary steps and actions to minimize all costs to the Agency as a result of the termination.
h. Take any action that may be necessary or that the Engineer may direct for the protection and preservation of the property related to the Contract that is in Contractor’s possession and in which the Agency has or may acquire an interest. 6-8.1 Termination Cost.
1. The Agency shall determine and pay Contractor the fair and reasonable amounts for Contractor’s termination cost as follows:
a. The Contract Price for completed services accepted by the Engineer no t previously paid or adjusted for any saving of freight and other charges. ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
b. The fair and reasonable cost of settling and paying termination settlements for terminated subcontracts that are chargeable to the terminated portion of the Contract.
c. The Agency shall pay Contractor a prorated amount of profit for Work that Contractor performed. The Agency shall not pay for lost profit on Work that was not performed by Contractor.
6-8.2 Termination Settlement.
1. After termination, Contractor shall submit a final termination settlement proposal to the Engineer no later than 3 months from the effective date of termination, unless extended in writing by the Engineer.
2. If Contractor fails to submit the proposal within the time allowed, the Agency may determine and pay the fair and reasonable amount that may be due Contractor as a result of the termination. If Contractor does not agree that the amount determined by the Engineer is fair and reasonable, Contractor must notify the Engineer within 30 Calendar Days of receipt of payment.
6-8.3 Determination of Amount Due the Contractor.
1. In determining the amount due Contractor, the Agency shall deduct the following:
a. The fair value of property destroyed, lost, stolen, or damaged that has become undeliverable to the Agency.
b. Any claim which the Agency has against Contractor under the Contract. 6-8.4 Records and Documents Relating to Termination.
1. The Engineer will file an Agreement of Mutual Rescission of Contract with the Board. Once the Agreement is executed and a Notice of Completion is recorded, retention can be released.
2. Unless otherwise specified or required by statute, Contractor shall maintain all records and documents relating to the terminated portion of the Contract for 3 years after final settlement. This includes all b ooks and other evidence bearing on Contractor’s costs, expenses, and settlement under the Contract. Contractor shall make these records and documents available to the Agency, at Contractor’s office, at all reasonable times, without any direct charge. If approved by the Engineer, Contractor may maintain photographs, microphotographs, and other authentic reproductions instead of original records and documents.
6-8.5 The Agency’s Right to Terminate or Suspend for Loss of Project Funds.
1. The Agency may terminat e or suspend the Contract at its sole discretion if the State of California or its agents render the funds being used to fund this Project unavailable. If the Agency chooses to suspend the Contract, that suspension shall last until funds are identified and approved by the Board, whichever is appropriate, to be used to complete this Project. If the Agency elects under this provision to terminate the Contract, then neither Party is entitled to compensation from the other Party for any costs arising from such termination.
The Agency may also elect to terminate after invoking a suspension under this provision. ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the time allowed shall result in damages being sustained by the Agency. Such damages are, and shall continue to be, impracticable and extremely difficult to determine. For each consecutive Working Day in excess of the time specified for the completion of the Work, as adjusted in accordance with 6-4, “DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME,” Contractor shall pay to the Agency, or have withheld from monies due it, the sum described in the table below, along with any other damages that may be sustained by the Agency during the Project , unles s otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
2. The execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement between Contractor and the Agency that the liquidated damage amount described in the table below is the value of the damage caused by Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the allotted time. Such sum shall not be construed as a penalty and may be deducted from Contractor’s payments if such delay occurs.
Contract Value Liquidated Damage Daily Amount
$100,000 and more $ 1,000
3. Any progress payments made to Contractor after the specified completion date shall not constitute a waiver of payment for damages sustained by the Agency under this section.
ADD 6- 10 RIGHT TO AUDIT
6-10.1 General.
1. The Agency retains the right to review, aud it, reasonably access Contractor’s and all Contractor’s Subcontractor’s premises to review and audit Contractor’s compliance with the provisions of the Contract. This includes the right to inspect, photocopy, and retain copies, outside of Contractor’s premises, of all records with appropriate safeguards if such retention is deemed necessary by the Agency in its sole discretion. The Agency will keep this information in strictest confidence.
2. Contractor shall include the Agency’s right to audit in its subcontracts and ensure that these specifications are binding upon all Subcontractors.
6-10.2 Audit.
1. The right to audit includes the right to examine any and all books, records, documents, and any other evidence of procedures and practices that the Agency determi nes is necessary to discover and verify that Contractor are in compliance with all requirements under the Contract.
2. If there is a claim for additional compensation or for changes in Work, the right to audit also includes the right to verify all direct and indirect costs which are claimed to have been incurred, anticipated to be incurred, or for which a claim for additional compensation or for changes in the Work have been submitted.
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
3. Contractor shall maintain complete and accurate records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices in the construction industry. Contractor shall also make available to the Engineer for review and audit all Project -related accounting records and documents and any other financial data. Upon the Engineer’s request, Contractor shall submit exact duplicates of originals of all requested records to the Engineer. 6-10.3 Compliance Required Before Mediation and Litigation.
1. As a condition precedent to proceeding with mandatory mediation and further litigation under 2 -10.2, “Dispute Resolution Process” Contractor shall comply with the audit specifications within 60 Calendar Days of the Engineer’s notice to review and audit compliance. See 5-2, “SPECIAL NOTICES.”
6-10.4 Access to Records on Federally Funded Projects.
1. Contractor shall retain all records, books, papers, and documents directly pertinent to the Contract for a minimum of 5 years after the Agency makes final payments and all other pending matters are closed and shall allow access to those records to the Agency, the Federal grantor agency, the Comptroller General of the United States, or any duly authorized representatives.
SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
7-2 LUMP SUM WORK
ADD 7- 2.1 Schedule of Values (SOV).
1. Submit a SOV for the lump sum Bid items of the Work to the Engineer for review and approval at the pre-construction meeting. The total value for the work described in the contract documents shall be shown in the SOV with category totals reflective of those values presented in Section 00 41 00 BID FORM, Bid Schedules A and B in the contract.
2. The SOV shall:
a) Subdivide the Work into its respective parts.
b) Include values for all items comprising the Work.
3. The Engineer is the sole judge of acceptable numbers, details, and description of values established. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a greater number of SOV items than proposed by Contractor is necessary, add the additional items identified by the Eng ineer. When requested by the Engineer, provide substantiating data in support of the SOV.
4. The Contractor shall develop the SOV independently but simultaneously with the development of the Schedule activities and logic. Incorporate phase funding impacts, if applicable, into the Schedule.
5. The Contractor shall break down the Work not specifically included in the Bid as necessary for establishment of cost and Schedule activity.
6. The Contractor shall update and submit these listings in conjunction with the Schedu le monthly submittals.
7. The Contractor shall incorporate issued Change Orders or Field Orders in the Schedule into the SOV as single units identified by the Change Order or Field Order number. ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
8. Changes to the Schedule which add activities not included in the original Schedule but included in the original Work (schedule omissions) shall have values assigned as accepted by the Engineer. Other activity values shall be reduced to provide equal value adjustment increases for added activities as accepted by the Engineer.
9. In the event that the Contractor and the Engineer agree to make adjustments to the original SOV because of inequities discovered in the original accepted SOV, increases and equal decreases to values for activities may be made.
10. The payment for the preparation of the SOV shall be included in the Contract Price. 7-3 PAYMENT
7-3.1 General.
To paragraph (8), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
If, within the time fixed by law, a properly executed notice to stop payment is filed with the Agency, due to the Contractor’s failure to pay for labor or materials used in the Work, all money plus 25 percent due for such labor or materials will be withheld from payment in accordance with applicable laws. At the expiration o f 30 Calendar Days from the date of recording the NOC, the amount deducted from the final estimate and retained by the Agency shall be paid to Contractor except such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly executed and filed notices to stop payment.
ADD the following:
1. Unless specified otherwise, the Contract Price includes use, consumer, and other taxes mandated by applicable legal requirements. The Contract Price is not subject to adjustment for tax increases.
2. As provided in California Public Contract Code Section 7105, if the Contract is not financed by revenue bonds, Contractor is not responsible for the cost of repairing or restoring damage to the Project when damage was proximately caused by an A ct of God, in excess of 5% of the Contract Price, if the following occur:
a. The damaged portion of the Project was built in accordance with the Contract requirements.
b. There are no insurance requirements in the Contract for the damages.
3. Guarantee periods shall not be affected by any payment but shall commence on the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion.
7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment.
To paragraph (5), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, Contractor shall have the option, at Contractor’s expense, to substitute for any money withheld by the Agency, securities equivalent to the amount being withheld. Securities eligible for such substitution are bank or savings and loans certificates of deposit or such securities which are eligible for investment pursuant to Government Code Section 16430. As to any such security or securities so substituted for monies ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
withheld, Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of same and shall receive any accrued interest.
Such security shall, at Contractor’s request and expense, be deposited with the Agency or with a State or Federally Chartered bank as the escrow agent who shall pay such monies to Contractor upon notification by the Engineer that payment can be made. Such notification shall be given at the expiration of 30 Calendar Days from the date of NOC, or as prescribed by law, provided however, that there shall be a continued retention of the necessary securities to cover such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly executed and filed notices to stop payment, or as may be authorized by the Contract to be further retained.
ADD the following:
1. After final inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the Contract Bid item and Change Order item with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the Contract. All prior estimates and progress payments shall be subject to correction in the Final Payment Estimate.
The Contractor shall have 30 C alendar Days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make a written statement disputing any Bid item or Change Order item quantity or payment amount. The Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its position. Should the Contractor fail to submit the statement and supporting documentation within the time specified, the Contractor acknowledges that full and final payment has been made for all Contract Bid items and Change Order items.
If the Contractor submits a written statement with supporting documents within 30 Calendar Days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate, the Engineer will review the disputed item within 30 C alendar Days and make any appropriate adjustments on the Final Payment.
Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the Engineer will be subject to resolution as specified in Section 2-10.1.1, Initiation of Claim.
The written statement filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of the disputed items. The Engineer will consider the merits of the Contractor’s claims. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying payment for the disputed items.
2. Final Payment and release of Retention shall be paid after Contractor submits the following:
a. An affidavit that payrolls and bills for materials, equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Agency or the Agency’s property might be responsible for or encumbered by. Fewer amounts withheld by the Agency shall have been paid for or otherwise satisfied.
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
b. A certificate evidencing that insurances required by the Contract Documents shall remain in force after Final Payment is currently in effect and shall not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least a 30 Calendar Days prior written notice has been given to the Engineer.
c. Consent of Surety to Final Payment.
d. If required by the Engineer, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, and security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract Documents. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Agency, Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Engineer to indemnify the Agency against such lien. e. If required in the Contract Documents, the successful completion and submittal of the required reports such as construction demolition, waste recycling, and hydrostatic discharge reports.
f. Required documentation, record drawings, operations manuals, test reports, warranty documentation, and UL labels shall be submitted before requesting the release of retention.
ADD 7- 3.2.1 Application for Progress Payment.
1. Using Application for Payment Form provided by Engineer, and by the 5th day of each month, sign, fill out, and submit to the Engineer a partial payment estimate that identifies acceptable Work performed during the previous month, or since the last partial payment estimate was submitted. If requested by the Construction Manager , provide such additional data as may be required to support the payment estimate. Such data may include submission of signed field orders and satisfactory evidence of payment for equipment, materials, and labor, including payments to Subcontractors and Suppliers.
2. Monthly schedule updates must be submitted for Engineer’s approval on monthly basis also and payment application approval will be contingent on schedule update approval.
3. Each month, the Engineer will make an approximate measurement of the Work performed to the closure date as basis for making monthly progress payments. The estimated value will be based on completed Contract and Change Order Work. Progress payments shall be made no later than 30 Calendar Days after the closure date. Five Working Days following the closure date, the Engineer shall complete the detailed progress pay estimate and submit it to the Contractor for the Contractor’s review. Should the Contractor assert that additional payment is due, the Contractor shall within 10 Calendar D ays of receipt of the progress estimate, submit adequate justification supporting the amount of supplemental payment request to the Engineer. Upon receipt of the supplemental payment request, the Engineer shall, as soon as practicable after receipt, determine whether th e supplemental payment request is a proper payment request. If the Engineer determines that the supplemental payment request is not proper, then the request shall be returned to the Contractor as soon as practicable, but not later than 7 Calendar Days after receipt. The returned request shall be accompanied by a document setting forth in writing the reasons why the supplemental payment request was not proper. Consistent with Public Contract Code Section 20104.50, the Agency shall make payments within 30 Ca lendar Days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted supplemental payment request from the Contractor. If payment of the undisputed ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
supplemental payment request is not made within 30 Calendar Days after receipt by the Engineer, then the Agency shall pay interest to the Contractor equivalent to the legal rate set forth in subdivision (a) of Code of Civil Procedure Code Section 685.010.
4. After final inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the Contract Bid item and Change Order item with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the Contract. All prior estimates and progress payments shall be subject to correction in the Final Payment Estimate.
5. The Contractor shall have 30 C alendar Days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make a written statement disputing any Bid item or Change Order item quantity or payment amount. The Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its position. Should the Contra ctor fail to submit the statement and supporting documentation within the time specified, the Contractor acknowledges that full and final payment has been made for all Contract Bid items and Change Order items.
6. If the Contractor submits a written statement with documentation in the aforementioned time, the Engineer will review the disputed item within 30 C alendar Days and make any appropriate adjustments on the Final Payment. Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the Engineer will be subj ect to resolution as specified in Section 2 -10, Disputed Work.
7. The written statement filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of the disputed items. The Engineer will consider the merits of the Contractor’s claims. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying payment for the disputed items.
8. Progress payments shall be signed, and the date of the invoice shall be the date that the invoice is submitted.
9. The Agency shall not pay progress or partial payments until Contractor submits to the Engineer an updated Schedule. It is solely the Contractor’s responsibility to prepare and submit the Schedule updates.
10. Disputed or incorrect applications shall be returned to the Contractor within 7 Calendar Days with documentation describing the reason for the rejection of the payment request.
ADD 7- 3.2.2 Amount of Progress Payments.
1. If an undisputed and properly submitted application for payment is received by the Engineer, the Agency shall pay Contractor within 30 Calendar Days after the Engineer receives the application for Payment consistent with Public Contract Code S ection 20104.50. The Agency shall pay Contractor for the Work performed, including the payment for offsite stored materials per section 7-3.3.1.2, through the period covered by the application for payment if the payment amount before Retention does not exceed the percentage of completion of the Work as set forth in the SOV.
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
ADD 7- 3.2.3 Waiver of Claims at Final Payment.
1. Contractor’s acceptance of Final Payment constitutes a waiver of affirmative c laims by Contractor, except those previously made in writing and identif ied as unsettled at the time of Final Payment, which are expressly reserved by Contractor from operation of its Release of Claims pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 7100 or other Applicable Law.
ADD 7- 3.2.4 Withholding of Payment and Back Charge.
1. The Engineer may withhold payment for any of the following reasons:
a. Defective or incomplete Work.
b. Stop notices, wage orders, or other withholdings required by Applicable Law. c. Contractor’s failure to comply with 5 -3.3, “Payroll Records” and the Contractor Registration and Electronic Reporting System requirements of the Contract Documents.
d. Failure to submit monthly Construction Schedule updates.
2. The Engineer may back charge the Contractor for any of the following reasons:
a. Defective or incorrect Work not remedied.
b. Damage to Agency property or a third party’s property that was caused by Contractor. c. Liquidated Damages.
d. Non-attendance at meetings without prior cancellation notice. e. Failed inspections or re-inspections paid by the Agency. 7-3.3 Delivered Materials
ADD 7- 3.3.1 Payment for Stored Materials on Site.
ADD 7- 3.3.1.1 General.
1. When authorized, Contractor may request payment for materials and equipment which has not been incorporated into the Work but will be at a later date and will be delivered and stored at the Project Site.
2. The material shall meet the Contract requirements and the material’s required test results and certifications shall be filed with the Engineer.
3. Only non -perishable materials for major items of Work or Materials Subject to Price Adjustment shall be considered for payment for on- site storage. However, each individual item has a value of more than 1% of the Contract Price and shall become a permanent part of the Work.
4. Materials cost shall be evidenced by the manufacturer’s paid invoic e bearing the statement that Contractor has paid all invoices in full.
5. The payments for the stored materials shall not exceed the invoice price or 60% of the Bid prices for the pay items into which the materials are to be incorporated, whichever is less, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
6. Apply for the payment for materials stored on a form provided by the Engineer and attach documentation to show the following:
a. The amount paid on the invoice (or other record of production cost) for the stored items.
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
b. The dollar amount of the material incorporated into each of the various Work items for the month.
c. The amount that should be retained for stored materials. d. That Contractor ha s received the materials and equipment free and are clear of all liens, charges, secured interests, and encumbrances.
e. That the materials and equipment are covered by the appropriate property insurance in accordance with the insurance provisions and other arrangements that protect the Agency’s interest.
7. Contractor shall provide the Engineer, upon request and prior to any partial payment, documentation which transfers full legal title to such materials to the Agency conditional only upon receipt of the Final Payment. Such transfer of title or any partial payment shall not constitute accep tance by the Agency of the materials nor shall it void the right to reject materials subsequently found to be unsatisfactory in accordance with SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIALS. This shall also not relieve Contractor of any obligation arising under the Contract Documents.
8. The payments for materials on-site are subject to retention as set forth in 7-3.2, “Partial and Final Payment.”
9. Contractor shall assume all risks associated with the loss or damage to the stored products for which payment has or has not been received.
10. Equipment and materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. The stored products shall be in a form ready for installation. The Agency shall not pay for raw materials or parts and pieces of equipment.
11. Any and all surplus materials that are not incorporated in the Work shall become Contractor’s property at no additional cost to the Agency.
12. Unless specifically provided in the Contract, payment for the materials on hand shall not be included when determining the percentage of Work completed.
13. The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which such materials are locally available and delivered to the job site in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight, and delivery.
The Agency reserves the right to approve materials and sources of supply, or to supply materials to the Contractor if necessary, for the progress of the Work. No markup shall be applied to any material provided by the Agency.
ADD 7- 3.3.1.2 Payment for Stored Materials Offsite.
1. The payment of materials and equipment delivered and stored offsite shall be contingent upon Contractor’s compliance with the storage and protective maintenance requirements set forth in the Contract Documents and all other requirements necessary to preserve equipment warranties for the benefit of the Agency.
2. The Agency reserves the right to refuse approval for the payment of any equipment or materials suitably stored offsite in its sole discretion, regardless of whether all conditions in the Contract Documents have been met.
3. Partial payment may be made for products eligible for offsite delivery and storage only upon Contractor’s presentation of a bill of sale, a paid invoice, or an affidavit certifying that the ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
material is received by the Contractor free and clear of all liens, encumbrances, and secured interest of any kind including offsite delivery.
4. Partial payment for products delivered and stored offsite shall be contingent upon Contractor’s compliance with the storage and protective maintenance requirements set forth in the Contract Documents and all other requirements necessary to preserve equipment warranties for the benefit of the Agency.
5. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated into the Work will no t be included in the progress estimate.
6. Costs associated with the delivery to and storage at an offsite facility shall be at Contractor’s expense regardless of the Engineer’s approval to deliver and store the materials.
7. Contractor shall provide written ev idence to the Engineer of having made arrangements for unrestricted access by the Agency and the Agency’s authorized representatives to the materials wherever stored, including provisions for the Agency to take control and possession of such materials at any time and without restriction. Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a permit of entry, from the owner of the property, for at least 6 months after the NOC has been filed. The permit of entry shall contain information similar to the following:
PERMIT O F ENTRY: Permission is granted to the Agency and its designated employees or agents to enter upon the property described in this permit for a period of not less than 6 months after the NOC has been filed for Carlsbad Senior Center Roof Replacement for the purpose of removing materials for which advance materials on hand payment has been made to (Contractor’s Name). The property is owned by (Owner’s Name) and is described as follows: (Address and Description of Property). (Include signature(s) and date(s) for owner and lessee or purchaser, and, if appropriate, attach a copy of a warehouse receipt or contract for storage.
8. The material shall be clearly marked and identified as being specifically fabricated, produced, and reserved for use on the Project. The Contractor shall provide payment documentation for the materials.
7-3.4 Mobilization.
ADD the following:
1. Mobilization consists of Work necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to and from the Site; for establishment of all offices, buildings, storage yards, and other facilities necessary for the Work; and for all other Work and operations which shall be performed prior to beginning the Work and after completion of the Work on the various Contract items on the Site.
2. Contractor shall properly design the Project parameters to incorporate construction mobility for moving on and off the Site in a manner that limits disturbance to the surrounding residences, businesses, and any other citizens. This includes the designated staging areas, loading areas, and assemblage areas. Contractor shall consider and address access rights of the public at all times. Prepare a mobilization plan that shall describe and govern Contractor’s mobilization activities.
••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
3. When a Bid item has been provided for “Mobilization,” payment for mobilization Work shall be distributed equally over the first 2 progress payments up to the Bid amount of the “Mobilization” Bid item but shall not exceed 3% of the Contract Price. If Contractor’s Bid item for “Mobilization” exceeds 3% of the Contract Price, then anything above 3% of the Contract Price shall be paid as a part of the Final Payment.
4. The complete dismantling and removal of all of Contractor’s properties, temporary facilities, equipment, materials, construction wastes, and personnel at the Site referred to as demobilization is included in the payment for mobilization, unless there is a Bid item for demobilization.
5. If a separate Bid item has not been provided for mobilization, the payment for mobilization is included in the Contract Price.
ADD 7- 3.9 Field Orders.
1. The Agency shall pay Field Order items of the Work in accordance with the limits below if the cumulative total of Field Orders does not exceed the “Field Orders” Bid Item:
Contract Price Maximum Field Order Amount
Less than $100,001 $2,500
$100,001 to $1,000,000 $5,000
7-4 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK
7-4.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. With every request for payment, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a breakdown showing monthly and cumulative amounts of the Work performed under the Change Order by Contractor and Contractor’s Subcontractors. The reporting format shall be approved by the Engineer.
2. When the price for the Extra Work cannot be agreed upon, the Agency will pay for the Extr a Work based on the accumulation of costs.
7-4.2 Basis for Establishing Costs.
7-4.2.1 Labor.
ADD the following:
1. The costs of labor will be the actual cost for wages of workers performing the Extra Work at the time the Extra Work is done, plus employer payments of payroll taxes, workers compensation insurance, liability insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs, resulting from federal, state, or local laws, as well as assessments or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements.
2. The use of a labor classification which would increase the Extra Work cost will not be permitted unless the Contractor establishes the necessity for such additional costs. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers shall be reported only when such costs are not ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
included in the invoice for equipment rental. The labor cost for foremen shall be proportionate to all their assigned work and only that applicable to Extra Work will be paid.
3. Nondirect labor costs, including superintendence, shall be considered part of the markup of Section 7-4.2.1(1).
4. The Agency reserves the right to request the following:
a. Financial records of salaries for an employee.
b. Wage rates/Certified Payroll.
c. Bonuses and deductions.
5. Contractor shall list the labor rates of its personnel and Subcontractors who work on the Project. The payment for payroll records is included in the Contract Price.
6. If Contractor’s proposal for Extra Work is based upon services and Work to be performed outside Normal Working Hours, the labor charges associated with the Extra Work shall consist of straight time wages and burdens plus the appropriate overtime or shift premium with no additional burdens, such as fringe benefits, on the premium portion. 7-4.2.3 Tool and Equipment Rental.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. No payment shall be made for the use of tools which have a replacement value of $200 or less.
2. Regardless of ownership, the rates and delay factors to be used in determining equipment rental costs shall not exceed those listed in the latest edition of the Caltrans publication entitled “Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates” preceding the date t he Work is accomplished. The latest edition of the Caltrans publication is available at www.dot.ca.gov .
The delay factors therein shall be used as multipliers of the rental rates for determining the value of costs for delay to the Contractor and Subcontractors, if any. The labor surcharge rates published therein are not a part of this Contract.
3. Contractor shall be entitled to a rental rate adjustment when Contractor can substantiate that the rental rates prevailing locally exceed the published rates by more than 15%. For equipment not listed in the Caltrans publication, rental rates shall not exceed listed rates prevailing locally at equipment rental agencies or distributors at the time the Work is performed.
4. Whenever possible, Extra Work shall be accomplished using equipment available on Site or owned by Contractor. If a specific piece of equipment shall be rented to be used exclusively for the Extra Work, the rental rate shall be the invoiced rate. The rental rates paid shall include the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, supplies, small tools, necessary attachments, repairs and maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, insurance, and all incidentals. Necessary loading and transportation costs for equipment used on the Extra Work shall be included.
5. If rental equipment is not being used or used intermittently and could be returned to its rental source rather than holding it at the Work S ite, the Contractor shall return the equipment at no expense to the Agency unless Contractor elects to keep it at the Work Site at Contractor’s expense.
6. The reported rental time for equipment already at the Work S ite shall be the duration of its use on the Extra Work. This time shall begin when equipment is first used on Extra Work, plus Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
the time required to move it from its previous site and back or from its previous site to a closer site.
7. All equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer, in good working condition, and suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used.
7-4.2.5 Invoices.
Vendors’ invoices for material, equipment rental and other expenditures shall be submitted with the request for payment. If the request for payment is not substantiated by invoices or other documentation, the Agency may establish the cost of the item involved at the lowest price which was current at the time of the report.
7-4.3 Markup.
7-4.3.1 Work by the Contractor.
DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:
The following percentages shall be added to the Contractor’s costs and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits:
Labor 20
Materials 15
Equipment Rental 15
Other Items and Expenditures 15
To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, 1 % shall be added as compensation for bonding.
7-4.3.2 Work by a Subcontractor.
DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:
When all or any part of the Extra Work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established in 7-4.3.1 shall be applied to the Subcontractor’s actual cost of such Work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the Extra Work and a markup of 5 percent on Work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the Extra Work may be added by the Contractor.
7-4.4 Daily Reports.
ADD the following:
Payment for Extra Work will not be made until such time that the Contractor submits completed daily reports and all supporting documents to the Engineer.
When the price for the Extra Work cannot be agreed upon, the Contractor shall submit a daily report to the Engineer on forms approved by the Agency. Included are applicable delivery tickets, listing all labor, materials, and equipment involved for that day, and other services and expenditures when authorized. Payment for Extra Work will not be made until such time that the ••
Exhibit 3
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
Contractor submits completed daily reports and all supporting documents to the Engineer.
Failure to submit the daily report by the close of the next Working Day may waive any rights for that day. An attempt shall be made to reconcile the report daily, and it shall be signed by the Engineer and the Contractor. In the event of disagreement, pertinent notes shall be entered by each party to explain points which cannot be resolved immediately. Each party shall retain a signed copy of the report. Reports by Subcontractors or others shall be submitted through the Contractor.
The report shall:
1. Show names of workers, classifications, and hours worked.
2. Describe and list quantities of materials used.
3. Show type of equipment, size, identification number, and hours of operation, including loading and transportation, if applicable.
4. Describe other services and expenditures in such detail as the Agency may require.
END OF SECTION
••
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
SECTION 2
01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
a. The Contractor is responsible to obtain all local, state and federal permits and licenses required to perform the Work. Payment for obtaining and complying with permits and licenses including, but not limited to, general construction permits, building permits, grading permits, encroachment permits, haul route permits, excavation permits, drilling permits, water discharge permits, temporary easements, licenses, inspection fees, and Federal, State and local taxes shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in prices Bid for Work for which such costs are appurtenant. b. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all costs incurred for permits necessitated by its operations such as, but not limited to, permits required for sewage bypass pumping or discharge; Night Work; overload; blasting or demolition or for any permit related to the operation of equipment used in such Work.
c. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits for the disposal of all waste or surplus materials removed from the Project. The cost of the permit(s) shall be included in the price for the Bid items requiring the permits and no additional compensation will be allowed for them.
d. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the permit or license to the Agency prior to performing the Work requiring the permit or license.
e. Contractor shall pay for all fees applicable to Contractor’s operations. f. Contractor shall not begin Work until all permits applicable to the Work are obtained.
Permits shall be maintained in valid status until acceptance of the Work by the Agency. g. The Contractor shall pay all business taxes or license fees that are required for the Work.
1. To the extent that there is a change in the type or cost of any permits, fees, licenses, or inspections after Contract award, there shall be an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price on account of such change under the Extra Work provisions.
2. The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by Applicable Laws.
The Contractor is not entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to the acquisition of permits.
3. The Contractor shall pay the Agency for regulatory fees, fines, or penalties imposed on the Agency arising from the Contractor’s failure to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
••
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
h. The Contractor shall obtain, pay for, and comply with required permits, licenses, work permits, and authorizations from appropriate agencies, including the following:
1. Licenses
i. Before submitting Bids, Contractors shall be licensed in accordance with provisions of Chapter 9, Division 3, of the Business and Professions Code. ii. City of Carlsbad Business License.
i. The Agency will obtain for the Contractor, the following:
1. CEQA Notice of Exemption
2. NEPA documents
3. City of Carlsbad Building Permit
••
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES CONTROLS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PAYMENT
1.03 WATER
a. Water in reasonable amounts required for and in connection with the Work to be performed will be furnished at existing fire hydrants by Agency without charge to Contractor. Contractor shall furnish necessary pipe, hose, nozzles, and tools and shall perform all necessary labor. Contractor shall make arrangements with the appropriate water department (who will fix the time, rate, and duration of each withdrawal from the distribution system) as to the amount of water required and the time when the water will be needed. Unnecessary waste of water will not be tolerated. Special hydrant wrenches shall be used for opening and closing fire hydrants. In no case shall pipe wrenches be used for this purpose.
b. All water required for and in connection with the Work to be performed will be furnished by Agency in the vicinity of the Site without charge to Contractor, provided:
a. Contractor shall procure such water in the location and in the manner designated by Engineer.
b. Contractor at its own expense shall make authorized con nections and provide means for delivering the water to the Site.
c. Contractor shall provide adequately against waste and needless use of water.
1.04 POWER
a. Contractor shall provide all power for heating, lighting, operation of Contractor's plant or equipment, or for any other use by Contractor. Temporary heat and lighting shall be maintained until the Work is accepted.
b. Construction Operations. Each Contractor shall provide all power for operation of its plant and equipment, or for any other use, except building heating and lighting. All building heating and lighting shall be provided under Contract.
c. Temporary Lighting and Heating. Contractor under Contract shall provide temporary heat and light for all buildings, to protect the Work and maintain s uitable working conditions.
Temporary heat and light shall be maintained until Work under Contract has been accepted by Agency.
d. When operational, the permanent heating and ventilating system and the permanent lighting system shall be used by Contractor under Contract to provide temporary heat and light. Before use of the permanent heating and ventilation system in the XXX building, Contractor shall install a filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in the system and remove the filter at end of construction.
e. Temporary heat shall be provided when the temperature falls below 50 °F (10°C) and as otherwise required to maintain reasonable working conditions and protect all Work,
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES CONTROLS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
materials, and equipment against damage from dampness or cold, to dry out the structure, or to maintain proper conditions for the installation and curing of materials. f. Heating equipment and fuels shall be suitable for the particular purpose and shall include adequate safety devices. Combustion type heaters shall not be used without pr oper venting nor in areas where such equipment might introduce a hazard. Heat from Owner's existing facilities shall not be used.
g. All enclosed areas shall be ventilated (using forced -draft equipment when necessary) as required to maintain proper conditions for workers and the Work and to avoid any accumulation of hazardous dust or fumes.
h. Power for heating, lighting, and operation of Contractor's plant and equipment in connection with the Work to be done under this Contract shall be provided by Agency without charge to Contractor, subject to the following conditions:
1. The existing heating system at each location will remain in operation and may be utilized by Contractor to the extent available.
2. Existing lighting systems at each location may be utilized by Con tractor to the extent available. Any necessary additional or temporary lighting systems shall be provided by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
3. Power will be available at existing power panels at the locations indicated on the Drawings.
4. Power will be available at 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase and 240/ 480 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
5. Contractor at its own expense shall make authorized connections to the existing power sources and shall extend temporary service lines to the required areas.
Temporary wiring shall conform to Article 305 of the NEC.
6. Contractor shall at all times provide adequately against waste and needless use of power. Electrical power shall be used only in such quantities as will not interfere with Owner's requirements, and care shall be taken not to overload the existing facilities. Contractor shall provide any additional or temporary electrical power or power of other voltages it may require for prosecution of the Work. i. These provisions shall not be construed as a guarantee by Agency of the uninterrupted continuation of power, and interruptions beyond the control of Agency shall not be reason for claims for additional costs nor for extensions of time. Contractor shall provide, at no additional cost to Agency, any necessary power required for prosecution of the Work during such interruptions.
1.05 SANITARY FACILITIES
a. Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the Site, as provided in the Contract, for the needs of all construction workers and others performing Work or furnishing services on the Project.
b. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the greatest practical extent. If
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES CONTROLS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at least 1 toilet will be furnished for each 20 persons. Contractor shall enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the Site.
1.06 VOICE AND DATA SERVICES
1.07 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
a. Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, and operate all construction aids required by it and its Subcontractors in the performance of the Work, except as otherwise provided in the Contract.
b. Contractor under Contract shall provide construction aids necessary for the performance of Work by other Contractors on the Project. Such construction aids shall be suitable for conditions encountered and shall include:
1. Elevators and hoists
2. Cranes
3. Temporary enclosures
4. Swing staging
5. Scaffolding
6. Temporary stairs
c. Construction aids shall be furnished without charge to the other Contractors, and all necessary erection, maintenance, and operating personnel shall be included. In the event of conflict, the Contractor furnishing the equipment shall determine priorities in the best interest of the Project.
d. The use of any plant equipment, whether furnished and installed under this Contract or not, including elevators, shop cranes, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and plumbing fixtures, shall be only with Agency's written permission.
1.08 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
a. Contractor shall conduct its Work to interfere as little as possible with public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross, obstruct, or close roads, driveways, a nd walks, whether public or private, Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private travel, and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives be fore interfering with them. Such maintenance of traffic will not be required when Contractor has obtained permission from the Agency and tenant of private property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, to obstruct traffic at the designated point.
b. Detours. Where required by the authority having jurisdiction thereover that traffic be maintained over any C onstruction Work in a public street, road, or highway, and the traffic cannot be maintained on the alignment of the origi nal roadbed or pavement, Contractor shall, at its own expense, construct and maintain a detour around the Construction Work. Each detour shall include a bridge across the pipe trench and all
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES CONTROLS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
necessary barricades, guardrails, approaches, lights, signals, signs, and other devices and precautions necessary for protection of the Work and safety of the public.
1.09 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS
a. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares which are closed to traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section.
b. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs, and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions, such as material piles and equipment, shall be provided with similar warning signs and lights. c. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights fro m sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and inconvenience to the traveling public. d. All barricades, signs, lights, and other protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway rights-of-way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereover.
1.10 FENCES
a. All existing fences affected by the Work shall be main tained by Contractor until completion of the Work. Fences which interfere with construction operations shall not be relocated or dismantled until written permission is obtained from the owner of the fence, and the period the fence may be left relocated or dismantled has been agreed upon.
Where fences must be maintained across the construction easement, adequate gates shall be installed. Gates shall be kept closed and locked at all times when not in use. b. On completion of the Work across any tract of land, Contractor shall restore all fences to their original or to a better condition and to their original locations.
1.11 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY
a. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or otherwise affected by its construction operations. All pavement, surfacing, driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod and shrubs in yards, parkways, and medians, shall be restored to their original condition, whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be made with new materials.
b. No trees shall be removed outside the permanent easement, except where authorized by the Engineer or Consulting Engineer. Whenever practicable, Contractor shall tunnel beneath trees in yards and parking lots when on or near the line of trench. Hand excavation shall be employed as necessary to preve nt injury to trees. Trees left standing shall be adequately protected against damage from construction operations.
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES CONTROLS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
c. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to streets, roads, highways, shoulders, ditches, embankments, culverts, bridges, and other public or private property, regardless of location or character, which may be caused by transporting equipment, materials, or workers to or from the Work Site or any part of it, whether by Contractor or its Subcontractors. Contractor shall make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with the owner of, or the agency or authority having jurisdiction over, the damaged property concerning its repair or replacement or payment of costs incurred in connection with the damage.
d. All fire hydrants and water control valves shall be kept free from obstruction and available for use at all times.
1.12 DAMAGE TO EXISTING PROPERTY
a. Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to existing structures, Work, materials, or equipment because of its operations and shall repair or replace any damaged structures, Work, materials, or equipment to the satisfaction of, and at no additional cost to, Agency.
b. Contractor shall protect all existing structures and property from damage and shall provide bracing, shoring, or other work necessary for such protection. c. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to streets, roads, curbs, sidewalks, highways, shoulders, ditches, embankments, culverts, bridges, or other public or private property, which may be caused by transporting equipm ent, materials, or workers to or from the Work Site. Contractor shall make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with the agency having jurisdiction over the damaged property concerning its repair or replacement.
1.13 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
a. All trees and other vegetation which must be removed to perform the Work shall be removed and disposed of by Contractor; however, no trees or cultured plants shall be unnecessarily removed unless their removal is indicated on the Drawings. All trees and plants not removed shall be protected against injury from construction operations. b. Trees considered by Engineer to have any significant effect on construction operations are indicated on the Drawings and those which are to be preserved are so indicated. c. Contractor shall take extra measures to protect trees designated to be preserved, such as erecting barricades, trimming to prevent damage from construction equipment, and installing pipe and other Work by means of hand excavation or tunneling methods. Such trees shall not be endangered by stockpiling excavated material or storing equipment against their trunks.
d. When injuring or removal of trees designated to be preserved cannot be avoided, or when removal and replacement is indicated on the Drawings, each t ree injured beyond repair or removed shall be replaced with a similar tree of the nearest size possible.
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES CONTROLS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
e. All trimming, repair, and replacement of trees and plants shall be performed by qualified nursery workers or horticulturists.
1.14 SECURITY
a. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of the Site, and all Work, materials, equipment, and existing facilities thereon, against vandals and other unauthorized persons.
b. No claim shall be made against Agency by reason of any act of an employee or trespasser, and Contractor shall make good all damage to Agency’s property resulting from Contractor's failure to provide security measures as specified. c. Security measures shall be at least equal to those usually provided by Agency’s to protect Agency’s existing facilities during normal operation, but shall also include such additional security fencing, barricades, lighting, watchman services, and other measures as required to protect the Site.
1.15 ACCESS ROADS
a. Contractor shall establish and maintain temporary access roads to various parts of the Site as required to complete the Project. Such roads shall be available for the use of all others performing work or furnishing services in connection with the Project.
1.16 PARKING
a. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitab le parking areas for the use of all workers and others performing Work or furnishing services in connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Agency’s operations, or construction activities.
1.17 NOISE CONTROL
a. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to avoid unnecessary noise. Such measures shall be appropriate for the normal ambient sound levels in the area during working hours. All construction machinery and vehicles shall be equipped with practical sound - muffling devices, and operated in a manner to cause the least noise consistent with efficient performance of the Work.
b. During construction activities on or adjacent to occupied buildings, and when appropriate, Contractor shall erect screens or barriers effective in reducing noise in the building and shall conduct its operations to avoid unnecessary noise which might interfere with the activities of building occupants.
1.18 DUST CONTROL
a. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by application of a chemical dust suppressant. When practicable, dusty materials in piles or in transit shall be covered to prevent blowing dust.
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES CONTROLS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
b. Buildings or operating facilities which may be affected adversely by dust shall be adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument panels, or similar equipment shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens.
1.19 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE PROVISIONS
a. Contractor shall provide for the drainage of storm water and such water as may be applied or discharged on the Site in performance of the Work. Drainage facilities shall be adequate to prevent damage to the Work, the Site, and adjacent property. b. Existing drainage channels and conduits shall be cleaned, enlarged, or supplemented as necessary to carry all increased runoff attributable to Contractor's operations. Dikes shall be constructed as necessary to divert increased runoff from entering adjacent property (except in natural channels), to protect Agency’s facilities and the Work, and to direct water to drainage channels or conduits. Ponding shall be provided as necessary to prevent downstream flooding.
1.20 EROSION CONTROL
a. Contractor shall prevent erosion of soil on the Site and adjacent property resulting from its construction activities. Effective measures shall be initiated prior to the commencement of clearing, grading, excavation, or other operation that will disturb the natural protection.
b. Work shall be scheduled to expose areas subject to erosion for the shortest possible time, and natural vegetation shall be preserved to the greatest extent practicable. Temporary storage and construction buildings shall be located, and construction traffic routed, to minimize erosion. Temporary fast-growing vegetation or other suitable ground cover shall be provided as necessary to control runoff.
1.21 POLLUTION CONTROL
a. Contractor shall preven t the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes, sediment, debris, and other substances resulting from construction activities. No sanitary wastes shall be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary sewers.
No sediment, debris, or other substance shall be permitted to enter sanitary sewers, and reasonable measures shall be taken to prevent such materials from entering any drain or watercourse.
1.22 PEST CONTROL
1.23 RODENT CONTROL
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES CONTROLS Date Printed: April 27, 2023 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: October 2022
AGENCY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS / PROJECT MANUAL
Project Manual | City of Carlsbad
Senior Center Roofing
January 16, 2023
2800 Third Avenue
San Diego, California 92103
619.692.9393
domusstudio.com
domusstudio architecture
1 PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 TITLE
Not Used
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00 Summary of the Work
01 23 00 Alternates
01 25 00 Products and Substitutions
01 26 00 Contract Modifications
01 31 00 Project Coordination
01 31 19 Project Meetings
01 32 00 Schedules, Reports and Payments
01 33 00 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
01 33 01 Submittal Schedule
01 40 00 Definitions & Standards
01 45 00 Quality Control Services
01 73 29 Cutting and Patching
01 74 00 Cleaning
01 74 19 Construction and Demolition Waste Management
01 77 00 Project Closeout
01 78 39 Record documents
DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 00 01 General Demolition, Alterations and Salvaging
02 41 19 Selective Demolition
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
Not Used
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
Not Used
DIVISION 5 METALS
Not Used
DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
Not Used
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 01 50 Preparation for Re-Roofing
07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels, Standing Seam
07 54 16 Ketone Ethylene Ester (KEE) Roofing
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07 92 00 Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8 OPENINGS
08 62 00 Prefabricated Skylights
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09 91 00 Painting
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
Not Used
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11 24 29 Facility Fall Protection
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
Not Used
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not Used
DIVISION 21 FIRE PREVENTION
Not Used
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
22 04 00 Plumbing
DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
2 23 00 00 Mechanical General
23 30 00 Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning
DIVISION 25 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Not Used
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical
26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cabling 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
26 27 26 Wiring Devices
26 28 13 Fuses
26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
Not Used
DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
Not Used
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
Not Used
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Not Used
DIVISION 33 UTILITIES
Not Used
01 11 00-1
SECTION 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF THE WORK
1.1 DESCRIPTIVE SUMMARY OF THE WORK:
1.1.1 Identification: Refer to the Contract (Owner -Contractor Agreement) for name location, project number and abbreviated identification of the work of the project.
1.1.2 Contract Documents : Requirements of the work are contained in the contract documents, and include cross -references herein to published information, which is not necessarily bound therewith. The misplacement addition or omission of any lette r, work or punctuation mark shall in no way damage the true spirit, intent or meaning in these specifications.
1.1.3 Narrative Summary: Without force and effect on requirements of contract documents, the description of the work of the Contract can be summarized as follows:
Work included in this contract is for the following:
Removal of the existing low slope roofing and replacement with new singly -ply membrane roofing.
Removal of the existing tile roofing, battens, and underlayment, and replacement with a new standing seam metal roofing system with compatible underlayment.
Repair of any damaged or deteriorated substrate.
Resloping of low slope roof areas as required to eliminate ponding.
Removal and replacement of existing, identified mechanical equipment with new mechanica l equipment.
All work shall be in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by domusstudio architecture.
Work not included in contract : Any equipment, work, or item indicated on the drawings to be N.I.C. (Not In Contract) shall be provided under some other contract or arrangements of the owner or others. If any equipment or item noted N.I.C. is to be by contractor, it will be so noted on drawings and/or specified in appropriate section of the specifications.
1.1.4 Contractor Use of Premises:
1.1.4.1 General: During the entire construction period, the Contractor shall keep the premises available for the Owner and existing site/facility operation.
1.1.4.1.1 Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available at all times. Do not use for parking or storage of materials. Coordinate with owner for staging location in parking area.
1.1.4.1.2 Do not encumber the site with materials or equipment.
1.1.4.1.3 Lock automotive type vehicles and other mechanized or motorized construction equipm ent, when parked and unattended. Do not leave vehicles or equipment unattended with the motor running or ignition key in place.
1.1.4.1.4 Allow continued operations of the existing buildings and site/facility operations and functions.
1.1.5 Compliance with Regulations: It is the intent of these contract documents that the project, when completed, shall conform to regulations of the "2019 California Building Code (CBC)”, California Administrative Code Title l9 Public Safety, California Administrative Code Title 24 Accessibility Standards and Energy Standards, Uniform Plumbing Code, National Electrical Code, NBFU, CAL/OSHA, and other applicable codes. All publications shall be of the latest edition in force at the time of building permit date.
1.1.5.1 Anything in the Contract Documents not withstanding, the Contractor accepts the responsibility of constructing a watertight, weather tight project.
1.1.6 Owner shall have access to the Work site at all reasonable times.
1.1.7 Scheduling and reasonable security measures are the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.1.8 Approved Applicators: Where specific instructions in these specifications require that a particular product and/or material(s) be installed and/or applied by an "approving applicator”of the manufacturer. It shall be the Contractor responsibility to insure that any subcontractors used for such work be approved applicators.
1.1.9 ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING SERVICES : It is understood that normal Architectural and Engineering liaison for the purpose of interpretation of the Drawings and Specifications is provided for the Owner. Should any services of the Archit ect be required to assist in the corrections of error or omissions in construction by the Contractor, or services of the Architect be required because of changes in structure or equipment w here the Contractor has requested approval of substitute methods of material these services will be provided by the Architect at their standard hourly rates and shall be paid for by the Contractor.
1.1.10 SCAFFOLD, STAGING, PROTECTION ETC : The work under each Section of these specifications shall include providing, installing and maintaining all scaffold, staging, testles, and planking necessary for the work under each Section in strict c onformity with applicable laws and ordinances and maintenance of same so as not to interfere with or obstruct the work of other trades. Addi tionally, the work under each Section of these specifications shall include providing all forms of protection as necessary to preserve the work of other trades free from damage. These provisions shall be considered as though repeated under each Separate Section of these specifications.
END OF SECTION 01 11 00
01 23 00-1
SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:
1.1.1 Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form that will be added to or deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a correspondi ng change in either scope of work or in products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents.
1.1.2 Coordination: Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as required to ensure that work affect ed by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project.
1.1.3 Notification: Immediately following award of Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether al ternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates, if any.
1.1.4 Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this section. Specification sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.
Include as a part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, appurtenances and similar items incident al to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES:
Reductive Alternate:
Provide reductive alternates for scopes identified in Mechanical Drawings .
END OF SECTION 01 23 00
01 25 00-1
SECTION 01 25 00 - PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 GENERAL LIMITATIONS:
Where possible, provide entire required quantity of each generic product, material or equipment from a single source; and, where not possible to do s o, match separate procurement as closely as possible. To extent selection process is under Contractor's control, provide compatible products, material and equipment. Where available and complying with requirements, provide standard produ cts which have bee n used previously and successfully in similar applications, and which are recommended by manufacturers for applications indicated.
1.2 PRODUCT SELECTION LIMITATIONS:
1.2.1 Product Selections: Comply with the following for selection of products, materials and equipment:
1.2.1.1 Single Product Named : Provide only that product, unless determined to be unavailable, non -compatible with the work, or non-complying with requirements or governing regulations.
1.2.1.2 Two or More Products Named: Selection from named products is Contractor's option, provided selection complies with requirements.
1.2.1.3 "Or Equal" Clause : Provide named product which complies with requirements, or comply with requirements for gaining approval on "substitution" to select and use an unnamed product.
1.2.1.4 "Or Prior Approved Equal" Clause: Provide named product which was prior approved as a substitution through proper process at time of bid as described in this section 1.3.1.3 as identified in Addenda.
1.2.2 Compliance with St andards: Selection of product which complies with requirements, including applicable standards, is Contractor's option where no product names are indicated.
1.2.3 Performance Requirements : Selection of product which has been tested to show compliance wi th requirements, including indicated performances, is Contractor's option where no product names are indicated.
1.2.4 Prescriptive Requirements : Selection of product which has been certified by manufacturer to comply with requirements, including prescriptive requirements, is Contractor's option where no product names are indicated.
1.2.5 Visual Requirements: Where indicated to be selected from manufacturer's standard options, selection is Architect's option, subsequent to determination or selection of m anufacturer (Contractor' option). Where indicated to be selected from among standard options available within industry, selection is Architect's/Engineer's option prior to determination or selection of manufact urer.
1.2.6 Nameplates: Where indicated or n eeded for operation and maintenance, provide permanent nameplates on equipment, located in inconspicuous but accessible places, and containing suitable information and operational data. Otherwise, do not a llow manufacturer's trademarks or similar labels or nameplates to be placed on products in locations where exposed to view after installation.
1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS:
1.3.1 Conditions: All proposals shall be considered only when submitted in strict compliance with Drawings and Specifications.
Except where expressly provided for in Specifications and defined in Supplementary Instruction to bidders, request for substitutions will not be considered. If Contractor determines that systems or products, to his knowledge and experience, will provide same func tion, design and value as those materials and methods specified herein, he may submit, with his proposal for work, on the attached Substitution Request Form stating difference in cost and reason(s) for such a proposal. Each attachment shall be reviewed by Owner and Architect prior to execution of work. In any case, requests for substitutions will not be considered after award of Contra ct unless for cost savings or unavailability. All proposals for substitutions shall comply with the following:
1.3.1.1 Substitutions shall, without exception, be manufactured of same basic materials, and comply with or exceed all specification requirements of dimension, function, structure and appearance, without deviation.
1.3.1.2 Use of approved substitutions shall in no way relie ve Contractor from responsibility for compliance, after installation. It shall be incumbent upon Contractor using approved substitutions to assume all extra costs caused by use of approved substitute materials, where affecting other work or trades. Under no circumstances shall Owner or Architect be required to pay for material or labor as a result of substitutions granted General Contractor.
1.3.1.3 Submittal of proposed substitutions under the "prior approved equal" clause shall be made only by the Genera l Contractor (Prime Bidder). The Architect will not entertain direct submittals by manufacturers, suppliers or subcontractors. The Architect/Engineer will consider written request(s) by a Prime Bidder only, for substitutions(s) which is/are considered equi valent to the item(s) specified. The written request will be considered only if it is received at least 12 (twelve) consecutive calendar days prior to the current established bid due date. The prime bidder shall furnish at his own expense and on their own letterhead the necessary data per the substitution request form to substantiate and validate that the physical, chemical and operational qualities of each substitute item is such that this item will fulfill its required function. The substitution if approv ed, will be authorized by a written addendum under "prior approved" items to the contract documents and made available to all prime bidders.
1.3.1.4 Substitutions for the specified product, brand or manufacturer that have been submitted for this project a nd disapproved by the Architect shall not be re -submitted in any modified form for this particular project, and the 01 25 00-2
General Contractor will be required to furnish the specified materials at no extra cost to the Owner.
1.3.1.5 In the event materials are su bstituted and installed without proper authorization, the Contractor shall remove all materials and install those specified at his own expense.
1.3.1.6 It shall be mandatory upon the Contractor using approved substitutions to determine the effect said sub stitution may have on other portions of the Work and so inform his subcontractors and employees of these effects. The Owner and Architect shall not be responsible for any effects to other portions of the Work caused by the use of approved substitutions.
1.3.1.7 Related to an "or equal" or similar provision in contract documents.
1.3.1.8 Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract Time requirements.
1.3.1.9 Required product is not acceptable to governing authority, or determin ed to be non -compatible, or cannot be properly coordinated, warrantied or insured, or has other recognized disability as certified by Contractor.
1.3.1.10 Substantial advantage is offered Owner after deducting offsetting disadvantages including delays, ad ditional compensation to Architect/Engineer for redesign, investigation, evaluation and other necessary services, and similar considerations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
Include full documentation, including product data, samples where appropriate, detailed performa nce comparisons and evaluations, testing laboratory reports where applicable, coordination information for effect on other work and time schedule, cost inform ation for proposed change order, Contractor's general certification of recommended substitution, a nd similar information germane to circumstance. The Substitution Request Form provided at the end of this Section shall be filled in and accompany submittal pa ckage.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Receive, store and handle products, materials and eq uipment in a manner which will prevent loss, deterioration and damage.
Schedule deliveries to minimize long-term storage at project site.
1.6 WARRANTIES (GUARANTEES):
1.6.1 Categories of warranties required for the work include: 1) Special project warranty issued by Contractor and, where required, countersigned by Installer or other recognized entity involved in performance of the work; 2) Specified product warranty issu ed by a manufacturer or fabricator, for compliance with requirements in contract doc uments; and 3) Coincidental product warranty available on a product incorporated into the work, by virtue of manufacturer's publication of warranty without regard for application requ irements (non-specified warranty). Refer to sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for requirements of specified warranties.
1.6.2 Warranty Obligations: Restore or remove-and-replace warranted work to its originally specified condition, at such time during warranty as it does not comply with or fulfill terms of warranty. Restore or remove-and-replace other work which has been damaged by failure of warranted work, or which must be removed and replaced to gain access to warranted work. Except as otherwise indica ted or required by governing regulations, warranties do not cover conse quential damages to property other than work of the Contract (e.g., building contents). Cost of restoration or removal -and-replacement is Contractor's obligation, without regard to whether Owner has already benefited from use of failing work.
1.6.2.1 Reinstatement of Warranty : Upon restoration or removal -and-replacement of warranted work which has failed, reinstate the warranty by issuing newly executed form, for at least the remaining period of time of the original warranty, but for not less than half of the original warranty period.
1.6.3 Owner's Recourse : Warranties and warranty periods do not diminish implied warranties, and do not deprive Owner of actions, rights and remedies otherwise available for Contractor's failure to fulfill requirements to re ject coincidental produce warranties considered to be conflicting with or detracting from requirements of the contract documents. 01 25 00-3
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
DATE: ______________________________________________
TO: ___________________________________ ___________
PROJECT: ______________________________________________ SPECIFIED ITEM:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Section Page Paragraph Description
The undersigned requests consideration of the following:
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: ____________________________________ PROPOSED MANUFACTURER: ____________________________________ REASON FOR SUBSTITUTION: _____________________________________________________________ ____________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Attached data includes product description, specification information, drawings, photographs, performance and test data for evaluation of request applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.
Attached data also includes description of changes to the Contract Documents which proposed substitution requires for its pro per installation.
The undersigned states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct:
1. The proposed substitution will not affect dimensions shown on the Drawings.
2. The undersigned will pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing and c onstruction costs caused by the requested substitution.
3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or the specified warranty/g uarantee requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.
The undersigned further states that the function, appearance and quality of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent or super ior to the Specified Item.
The difference in cost shall reflect a savings/increase (circle one) to the Owner $__________.
Submitted By:
Signature: ____________________________
Firm: ____________________________
Address: ____________________________
____________________________________
Date:
Telephone: __________________________
Reviewed for General Contractor by:
____________________________________
Accepted
Accepted as Noted
Rejected
Received too Late
By: ____________________________
Date: ____________________________
Remarks: ____________________________
____________________________________
END OF SECTION 01 25 00
01 26 00-1
SECTION 01 26 00 – CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.1 Sections Include:
1.1.1 Change Procedures.
1.1.2 Request for Information Procedures
1.2 Related Documents or Sections:
1.2.1 Document - Contract
1.2.2 Document – General Conditions
1.2.3 Section 01 33 00 - Submittals
1.3 Change Procedures:
1.3.1 Contractor shall establish measures as needed to assure familiarity of the Contractor’s staff and employees with procedures for processing changes in Contract Documents.
1.3.2 The Contractor shall maintain and coordinate a Register of Requests for Information, Architects Supplemental Instructions, Contractor Change Order Requests, Construction Change Directives, Field Change Orders and Change Orders at the job site, accurately reflecting current status of all pertinent data as submitted by the Contractor.
1.3.3 Per General Conditions, Contractor is not authorized to make changes to the Work described by any of the Contract modification documents specified in this Section, until said documents are signed by the Owner.
1.3.4 Architect’s Supplemental Instruction (ASI): The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work that do not involve an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on form provided by the Owner.
1.3.5 If Contractor considers the minor change does represent a change in the contract, Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner of Contractors intention to make a claim.
1.3.6 Proposal Request (PR) : The Architect may issue a Proposal Request, which include s a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications.
1.3.6.1 Analyze the change and its impact on costs and time. Submit response within 10 days. If accepted by Owner, Architect will prepare Change Order.
1.3.6.2 When requested, meet with the Architect as required explaining costs and, when appropriate, determining other acceptable ways to achieve the desired objective.
1.3.6.3 Alert pertinent personnel and subcontractors as to the impending change and, to the maximum extent p ossible, avoid such work as would increase the Owner’s cost for making the change, advising the Architect in writing when such avoidance no longer is practicable.
1.3.6.4 Following review, and if accepted by Owner, Architect or Contractor will prepare Change Order.
1.3.7 Change Order Request (COR):
1.3.7.1 Contractor may submit a COR to the Owner for changes in conditions, Owner changes, or other direction from the Architect, jurisdictional authority or Owners inspector.
1.3.7.2 Document the proposed change, per the Greenbook (current edition) Sections 2-8, 2-9, and 2-10, and its complete impact, including its effect on the cost and schedule of the work.
1.3.7.3 Present total cost and schedule impacts in documentation, per the Greenbook (current edition) Sections 2-8, 2-9, and 2 -10, including all mark -ups permitted by General Conditions. Provide detailed back -up as required by Architect, including supplier costs, sub -contractor labor time and rates, and all other data deemed necessary by Architects.
1.3.8 Field Change Order (FCO) : Field C hange Order will be issued by the Owner in accordance with procedures established in the Greenbook (current edition) Sections 2-8, 2-9, and 2-10.
1.3.9 Change Order (CO): Change Orders will be issued by the Owner or Contractor in accordance with procedures established in the Greenbook (current edition) Sections 2-8, 2-9, and 2-10.
1.3.10 Construction Change Directives (CCD) : Construction Change Directives (CCD) will be issued by the Owner in accordance with procedures established in the Greenbook (current edition) Sections 2-8, 2-9, and 2-10. 01 26 00-2
1.3.11 Architect will provide a single copy of all documents issued under this Article for transmission to Contractor. Contractor sh all prepare copies as required for distribution to subcontractors, suppliers and others at no cost to Owner.
1.4 Payment For Contract Modifications:
1.4.1 The Contractor shall compensate the Owner, by Owner-Contractor Contract adjustment, for the Architect reasonable costs to modify Contract Documents required by work not performed in accordance with approved Contract Documents.
1.5 Request For Information:
1.5.1 The Architect will respond to legitimate and bonafide Requests for Information (RFI) initiated by Contractor.
1.5.2 Submit all RFI’s on the attached form OR Contractors standard form . Contractor shall sequentially number the issued documents and maintain a RFI log on site indicating summary, date issued, date information required, and date information received.
Use of Contractors form will not be accepted. RFI’s submitted by subcontractors or supplier will not be reviewed.
1.5.3 The Contractor shall compensate the Architect, by Owner -Contractor Contract adjustment, for the Architects reasonable costs to respond to RFI’s if the Architect determines:
1.5.3.1 The RFI does not reflect careful study and review of the documents, or;
1.5.3.2 Demonstrates a lack of knowledge or construction competency reasonably expected of a Contractor performing the work.
1.5.4 The Architect’s action will be taken with such reasonable promptness (generally within 10 working da ys) while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review.
1.5.5 RFI’s received in Architects office after 9:00 AM Friday will be logged in as received by Architect on Monday, 8:00 AM. This applies to all forms of communication, including RFI’s arriving via FAX transmission.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS:
Not Used
PART 3 – EXECUTION:
Not used
01 26 00-3
CONTRACTORS REQUEST FOR INFORMATION RFI #
From: domusstudio Project # Date:
To: domusstudio Project:
Disciplines Impacted: [] Structural [] Mechanical [] Electrical [] Architectural [] Civil [] Landscape [] Kitchen []
Reference: Drawing(s) Spec Section(s) Other
Please clarify or provide the following information:
Possible Cost Impact [] Increase [] Decrease [] No Change [] Unknown Possible Time Impact [] Increase [] Decrease [] No Change [] Unknown This information is required as soon as possible, [ ] PRIORITY ATTENTION but no later than REQUIRED
Copies to:
Contractors Representative
Architects Response: Date:
Copies to:
domusstudio architecture Representative
END OF SECTION 01 26 00
01 31 00-1
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT COORDINATION
1.1 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION:
1.1.1 Coordination:
1.1.1.1 The Contractor shall consult the contract documents, the field layouts of the various trades, their shop drawings and applicable manufacturer's bro chures and instructions, and the Contractor shall coordinate all phases of the work described and affected by these documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accurate location and layout of all chases, pipe sleeves and openings in the construc tion required to accommodate the work of all the trades, and with work by separate contractors (if any) and by Owner.
1.1.1.2 Divisions of the Specifications:
1.1.1.2.1 These specifications are divided for convenience into sections as set forth in the in dex of the specifications.
1.1.1.2.2 Schedules of work included in these sections are given for convenience and shall not be considered as a comprehensive list of items necessary to complete the work of any section.
1.1.1.2.3 Where devices or items, or p arts thereof are referred to in the singular, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices, items or parts as are required to properly complete the work.
1.1.1.2.4 Where the specifications are divided into two or more sections, t he Contractor shall coordinate the work covered in each section with the work of other sections. The necessary information and the items, accessories, anchors, connections, patterns, templates, etc., shall be delivered when required, in order to prevent an y delay in the progress and completion of the work.
1.1.1.2.5 Items or parts of work specified shall constitute a responsibility of the Contractor, regardless of where they are located in the specifications. The Architect will not make decisions on jurisd iction or responsibilities of subcontractors.
1.1.1.3 Errors and Omissions : Should there be omissions or discrepancies found to exist between the drawings and specifications or any parts of either, or should language of any part of the contract prove to be ambiguous or doubtful, the Contractor shall notify the Architect, who will decide as to the true intent and meaning. Should the Contractor fail to give such notification in writing and proceed with the work so affected without receiving proper instructions from the Architect, he shall do so at his own risk, and he shall remove and replace the work so as to be in compliance with the Architect's instructions. The costs of replacing said work and of any damages or defects which result shall be paid by the Contractor.
1.1.1.4 Oral Modifications: It shall be distinctly understood that no oral statement of any person shall be allowed in any manner to modify any of the contract provisions. Changes shall be made only on written authorization of the Architect except in an emergency endangering life or property.
1.1.1.5 Transmittal: Any notice from one party to the other under the contract shall be in writing, and shall be dated and signed by the party giving such notice, or by duly authorized representative of such party.
1.1.2 Preparation for Installation:
1.1.2.1 Installer Inspections : Require installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate and conditions for installation, and to report (in writing) unsatisfactory conditions. Subcontractor's sho uld notify Contractor in writing of unacceptable substrate conditions to correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. Inspect each product immediately before installation. Once a contractor or subcontractor proceeds or installs over defective or nonsuitable substrate conditions it is now the responsibility of the Contractor and latest trade subcontractor involved to correct all work. Do not install and/or install over damaged or defective products, materials or equipment.
1.1.2.2 Pre-Installation C onference: Prior to starting installation of each major component of the work, hold a pre - installation conference, attended by each entity involved or affected by planned installation. Include technical representatives of product manufacturers and others recognized as expert or otherwise capable of influencing success of the installation.
1.1.3.2.1 The Contractor to provide 7 -day notification of the date and time of each meeting to the Owner’s representative and the Architect so they can attend if they de sire. In any event, the Contractor shall document minutes of the meetings and provide copies to the Owner’s representative and the Architect
1.1.3.2.2 Review significant aspects of requirements for the work. Record discussion and distribute as plan of action.
1.1.2.3 Installation, General:
1.1.3.3.1 Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to extent printed information is more detailed or stringent than requirements contained directly in contract documents.
1.1.3.3.2 Timing: Install work during time and under conditions which will ensure best possible results, coordinated with required inspection and testing.
01 31 00-2
1.1.2.3.3 Anchor work securely in place, properly located by measured line and level, organized for best possible uniformity, visual effect, operational efficiency, durability, and similar benefit to Owner's use. Isolate non - compatible materials from contact, sufficiently to prevent deterioration.
1.1.2.3.4 Mount individual units of work at industry -recognized mounting heights, if not otherwise indicated; refer uncertainties to Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
1.1.2.3.5 Contractor shall coordinate and provide protection of dissimilar metals coming in contact with one another. Contractor shall provide adequate barriers ( size, type and method prior approved by Architect prior to installation) to prevent electrolysis and/or breakdown of adjacent metals.
1.1.3 Cleaning and Protection:
1.1.3.1 General: For each element of work, provide sufficient maintenance and protection during construction to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration and clean each element of work thoroughly at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 01 31 00
01 31 19-1
SECTION 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The work inc ludes scheduling and administering project progress meetings as specified herein. The Conditions of the Contract and other sections of Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
1.2.1 City will schedule and administer progress meetings, prepare agendas, and make arrangements for meetings. City will make advance notices of regular and special meetings at least four working days prior to meeting.
1.2.2 The Architect and Owner will attend meetings to ascertain that the project is expedited consistent with construction schedule and with Contract Documents. The Architect will record minutes including all significant proceeding and decisions and will distribute copies to all participants no later than four working days after the meeting . Unless advised expeditiously in writing otherwise the Contractor and the team members will assume that the minutes accurately record the events discussed and agreements reached at the meeting.
1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING:
1.3.1 City will schedule the meeting prior to Notice to Proceed.
1.3.2 Attendance: Owner, Architect and his Consultants, Contractor, major subcontractors of the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable)
END OF SECTION 01 31 19
01 32 00-1
SECTION 01 32 00 - SCHEDULES, REPORTS and PAYMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND REPORTS:
1.1.1 General: Within 5 days of date established for notice to proceed, submit a comprehensive progress schedule per the Greenbook (current edition) Section 6-1 indicating a time bar for each significant category or unit of work to be performed at the site.
Arrange schedule to indicate required sequencing of units, and to show time allowances for submittals, inspections and simila r time margins.
1.2 SUBMITTAL:
Following initial revision of schedule after Architect's review, print and distribute schedule to entities with a need -to-know responsibility, including three copies to Architect. Revise at intervals matching payment requests, work accomplished, and redistribute/repost.
Provide copies required with payment requests.
1.2.1 A copy of the most recent updated Construction Schedule shall be posted in the Contractor's job office, and copies of all out - of-date schedules shall be kept at the job office at all times for perusal by the Owner.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES:
1.3.1 Immediately upon being awarded the Contract, and before request for payment, prepare and submit to the architect a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the work. Thi s Schedule of Values, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.3.2 The schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. Follow the table of contents of this Project Manual as the forma t for listing component items. For each major line item, list sub-values of major products or operations under the item, where applicable.
1.3.3 Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit.
1.3.4 Submit a subschedule for each separate stage of work specified in Section 01 11 00.
1.3.5 The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract sum.
1.4 PAYMENT REQUESTS:
1.4.1 Submit payment requests per the Greenbook (current edition) Section 7-3.
PART 2 - MATERIAL ((Not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable)
END OF SECTION 01 32 00
01 33 00-1
SECTION 01 33 00 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATAand SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
The work includes the preparation and submission of samples, shop drawings and product data as specified herein and in the va rious sections of these specifications. The requirements specified herein are in addition to any requirements for samples and shop drawings, product data materials lists, substitutions of materials, or other submittals specified elsewhere in these specifications. Th e Conditions of the Contract and the other sections of Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.
PART 2 - DEFINITIONS:
2.1 As used herein, the term "manufactured" applies to standard units usually mass -produced; and "fabricated" means items specifically assembled or made out to selected materials to meet individual design requirements.
PART 3 - GENERAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
3.1 SCHEDULING:
Submit samples, shop drawings, and product data in accordance with the schedule specified in Section 01 33 01 but in no e vent later than 60 days after Notice to Proceed. Extension of Contract time will not be granted because of the Contractor's failure to make timely submittals. Do not purchase materials or equipment or begin work covered by the required submittals until su bmittals have been reviewed and returned.
3.2 TRANSMITTAL:
Accompany each submittal with a dated, signed and sequence numbered transmittal on forms prescribed by the Architect. Include all information required by this form including project identificat ion, name and address of Contractor and of subcontractor or supplier, a list of items included in the submittal, and identification of drawing numbers, specification section and paragraph numbers to whi ch the submittal pertains, and space for Contractor's review and approval stamp.
3.3 CHECK OF RETURNED SUBMITTALS:
Check the submittals returned for correction and ascertain if the corrections result in extra cost above the included under t he Contract Documents, and give written notice within five days if, in Contractor's opinion, such extra cost results from corrections. By failing to so notify or by starting any Work covered by a submittal, Contractor waives all claims for extra costs resulting from required corrections.
PART 4 - SAMPLES
4.1 Furnish for review, samples of the various materials, together with the finish thereon, as specified for and intended to be used on or in the work. Samples shall be sent to the office of the Architect, carriage prepaid. The Architect will distribute the samples, when approved.
4.2 Submit all samples to the Architect for review before purchasing, fabricating, applying or installing such materials and fini shes. The Architect will review and take action on samples within ten working days of the Contractor's submission. A ll actions will be by the Architect in writing.
4.3 Submit all samples, other than field samples, in sets of three. A covering letter shall accompany the sample and shall list all items being transmitted, designating their particular usage and location in the project and shall be identified as to manufacturer, trade name, style, model, etc. Two approved samples shall be returned to the Contractor with one returned set to maintain at the project site fo r purposes of quality control comparisons. Provide samp le cabinet at job site for storage of returned samples. Owner and Architect each will retain one set of samples.
4.4 Approval of a sample shall not be taken in itself to change or modify any contract requirement. All materials, finishes, and workmanship in the completed building shall be equal in every respect to that of the approved sample.
4.5 Unless otherwise specified, samples shall be 8"x10" in size and shall be limited in thickness to a minimum consistent with sa mple analysis. In lieu thereof, the actual full size item may be submitted.
4.6 Samples of value may be returned to the Contractor for use in the project after review, analysis, comparison and/or testing a s may be required by the Architect, provided that the location is recorded and the samples bear temporary identification as samples.
4.7 Field samples shall be prepared at the site by the Contractor as specified in the various sections of these Specifications. A ffected finished work shall not be commenced until the Architect has given written approval for the field samples.
PART 5 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
5.1 SHOP DRAWINGS:
The term "shop drawings" as used herein includes fabrication and installation, layout and setting drawings; wiring and contro l diagrams; and other drawings as defined in the applicable Section(s) of the General Conditions, Current Edition, as referenced herein.
5.1.1 The Contractor shall check and verify all field measurements and shall submit for review, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or in that of any other contractor or subcontractor, all shop or setting drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades. Shop drawings shall be prepared at the Contractor's expense and shall be sent to the office of th e Architect, 01 33 00-2
carriage prepaid if applicable.
5.1.2 Drawings shall show all information required by the applicable Technical Section and shall be in sufficient detail as may be required to show that fabricated materials, equipment or systems, and the positions thereof conform to the Contract Documents.
5.1.3 Shop drawings shall establish the actual detail of all fabricated items, indicate proper relation of adjoining work, amplify design details of mechanical and electrical equipment in proper relation to physical space s in the structure, and incorporate minor changes of design or construction to suit actual conditions. Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale and shall be completely dimensioned.
5.1.4 Composite Shop Drawings and Field Layouts : Prepare and submit composit e Shop Drawings and field layouts as required to solve tight field conditions and when required to coordinate the Work of several trades. Include dimensioned plans, elevat ions, sections, and details and give complete information particularly as to kinds an d types of materials and equipment, size and location of sleeves, inserts, attachments, chases, openings, conduits, ducts, boxes, and structural interferences. Coordinate these compo site Shop Drawings and field layouts in the field for proper relationship to Work of applicable trades based on field conditions. Contractor shall have competent personnel readily available for coordinating, checking, and supervision of field layouts. The procedures for submittals and resubmittals, and final distribution shall be as specified for Shop Drawings.
5.1.5 Prepare shop drawings on sheet of same size as project drawings or on 8-1/2" x 11" document/files.
5.1.6 Each shop drawing shall have a title block containing the following information:
5.1.6.1 Name and location of the project.
5.1.6.2 Name and address of the Contractor.
5.1.6.3 Name and address of the subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor as applicable.
5.1.6.4 Name and address of Owner.
5.1.6.5 Date, scale of drawings and identification number.
5.1.6.6 Space for the Contractor's review and approval stamp.
5.1.7 Grouping of Submittals
Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Architect, make all submittals in groups containing all associated items. Arch itect may reject partial submittals as not complying with the provisions of the contract documents.
5.1.8 Submit one electronic file set of each shop drawing only for Architect ’s action. Architect will d istribute as required for Consultant review/comment.
5.1.9 The Architect will review and take action on shop drawings within ten working days of the Contractor's submission. All actions will be by the Architect in writing.
5.2 PRODUCT DATA:
The terms "product data" as used herein includes manufacturer's standard drawings, certificates of c onformance, substantiating calculations and other data as defined in Clause 3.12.2 of the General Conditions.
5.2.1 The data shall include all information required by the applicable technical section and shall be in sufficient detail to show that manufactured materials and equipment conform to the Contract Documents.
5.2.2 Catalog Cuts: Clearly mark each copy to indicate the product or model as well as all optional sizes, finishes or other features proposed for use. Delete all inapplicable data.
5.2.3 Submittal Preparation : Submit one electronic file set of each product data for Architect’s action . Architect will distribute as required for Consultant review/comment. Group product data with labeled cover sheets with an index listing the contents.
Undocumented product data submittals will be returned without review.
5.2.4 The Architect will review and take action on product data within ten working days of the Contractor's submission. All actions will be by the Architect in writing.
5.3 ARCHITECT'S ACTION:
The Architect will review the submittals with reasonable promptness (generally ten working days) and will affix the Architect 's initials or signature as follows:
5.3.1 Submittals stamped "R EVIEWED" require no further action and fabrication and/or cons truction may proceed. The Architect will stamp and return to the Contractor, the transparency and one copy of shop drawings and one marked copy and four unmarked copies of brochures, schedules, materials lists, and other product data, except where required otherwise.
5.3.2 Submittals stamped "FURNISH AS CORRECTED" require no further action and fabrication and/or construction may proceed contingent upon all corrections being made as noted. Quantities returned to be as specified in paragraph 5.3.1.
5.3.3 Submittals stamped "REJECTED" or "REVISE AND RESUBMIT" or “ SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM ” require the Contractor to 01 33 00-3
resubmit them with reasonable promptness and no fabrication or construction may begin. The Architect will stamp and return to the Contractor; the tra nsparency of shop drawings and one marked copy and four unmarked copies, of brochures, schedules, materials lists, and other product data.
5.3.4 Resubmittals: If first or subsequent submittal is stamped "REJECTED" or "REVISE AND RESUBMIT", corrective act ion shall be taken and resubmittal procedure shall be same as for first submittal. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in wr iting, by highlighting, by clouding, or in some matter clearly noting on resubmitted shop drawing corrections as to revisions requested and also revisions other than the correction requested by the Architect on previous submissions.
5.3.5 Distribution Copies: The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining required reviewed electronic files & samples and for distribution to Subcontractors. All distribution files of shop drawings and product data and physical copies of samples shall bear the Architect's review stamp. Maintain one copy of all submittals at the project site.
5.4 The Architect will check and take action on such drawings and schedules only for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with information given in the contract documents. When so directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall make any and all corrections required by the Architect.
5.5 The shop drawings, product data and supporting data shall be prepared by the Contractor or his suppliers and subcontractors, but shall be submitted as the instruments of the Contractor.
5.6 The Contractor shall check the drawings of his supp liers and subcontractors as well as his own drawings before submitting them. In particular, the Contractor shall ascertain that the drawings meet all requirements of the contract drawings and specification s, and conform to the structural and space conditio ns. If such shop drawings show variations from contract documents, whether because of standard shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall clearly describe such variations including other changes requir ed to correlate the work in his letter of transmittal.
5.7 Shop drawings, product data and samples, when submitted to the Architect for review, shall be accompanied by a written statem ent signed by the Contractor, that the shop drawings, product data, and samples have been checked by him and found t o be in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications, and that proper provision has been made to accommodate all abutting work. This statement may be in the form of an approval stamp bearing the Contractor's (superintendent) signature. Submitta ls shall be rejected if Contractor fails to take appropriate action prior to submission.
5.8 Substantiating calculations, when specified, shall be prepared and signed by a California registered civil or structural engi neer, employed by the Contractor.
5.9 The Architect's review of submittals will be general only and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort, for deviations from drawings or specifications, or for conflict with the work of others that may result from such d eviations. Architect's review of a separate item does not indicate a review of an assembly in which the item functions. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract A201, Current Edition as referenced herein, for other pertinent information.
END OF SECTION 01 33 00
01 32 00-1
SECTION 01 33 01 - SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
The work includes the preparation and submission of samples, shop drawings and product data as specified herein and in the va rious sections of these specifications. The req uirements specified herein are in addition to any requirements for samples and shop drawings, product data materials lists, substitutions of materials, or other submittals specified elsewhere in these specifications. Th e Conditions of the Contract and the other sections of Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.
PART 2 - DEFINITIONS:
2.1 As used herein, the term "manufactured" applies to standard units usually mass -produced; and "fabricated" means items specifically assembled or made out to selected materials to meet individual design requirements.
PART 3 - SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
01 74 19 C&D Waste Management Plan, C&D Waste Management Summary Reports 01 78 39 Record Drawings, Record Specifications
02 41 19 Dust Control, Noise Control
07 41 13 Product Data, Test Reports, Shop Drawings, Details, Design, Samples, Qualifications, Certificates, Test Reports, Quality Cont rol Reports, Warranties, Maintenance Data,
07 54 16 Product Data, Test Reports, Shop Drawings, Samples, Certificates, Qualifications, Test reports, Warranties, Maintenance Data 07 62 00 Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, Certificates, Warranties 07 92 00 Product Data, Samples, Certificates
11 24 29 Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, Qualification Data, Test Reports, Operation and Maintenance Data END OF SECTION 01 33 01
01 40 00-1
SECTION 01 40 00 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS
PART 1 - DEFINITIONS:
1.1 General: Except as specifically defined otherwise, the following definitions supplement definitions of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and other general contract documents, and apply generally to the work.
1.1.1 General Requirements : The provisions of Division 1 sections, General Requirements, apply to the entire work of the Contract.
1.1.2 Indicated: Shown on drawings by notes, graphics or schedul es, or written into other portions of contract documents. Terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" have same meaning as "indicated", and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information.
1.1.3 Directed, Requested, Approved, Accepted, etc.: These terms imply "by the Architect/Engineer", unless otherwise indicated.
1.1.4 Reviewed/Approved by Architect/Engineer : In no case releases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill requirements of contract documents. Architect/Engineer is typically reviewing for general conformance and compliance of the Contract Documents.
1.1.5 Project Site: Space available to Contractor at location of project, either exclusively or to be shared with separate contractors, for performance of the work.
1.1.6 Furnish: To supply and deliver to the project site, ready for installation.
1.1.7 Install: To place in position for service or use.
1.1.8 Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
1.1.9 Demolish: to remove.
1.1.10 Salvage: to remove or deconstruct in a manner to prevent damage and safely store for reuse.
1.1.11 Restore: to rehabilitate to the original, or new condition and reinstall.
1.1.12 Installer: Entity (firm or person) engaged to install work, by Contractor, subcontractor or sub -subcontractor. Installers are required to be skilled in work they are engaged to install.
1.1.13 Specification Text Format : Underscoring facilitates scan reading, no other meaning. Imperativ e language is directed at Contractor, unless otherwise noted.
1.1.14 Overlapping/Conflicting Requirements : Most stringent (generally) requirement written directly into the contract documents is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detaile d language written into the contract documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. Refer uncertainties to the Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding.
1.1.15 Minimum Requirements : Indicated requirements are fo r a specific minimum acceptable level of quality/quantity, as recognized in the industry. Actual work must comply (within specified tolerances), or may exceed minimums within reasonable limits.
Refer uncertainties to Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
1.1.16 Abbreviations, Plural Words: Abbreviations, where not defined in contract documents, will be interpreted to mean the normal construction industry terminology, determined by recognized grammatical rules, by the Architect/Engineer. Plural words w ill be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of contract documents.
1.1.17 Testing Laboratory: An independent entity engaged for the project to provide inspections, tests, interpretations, reports and similar services.
1.2 Standards and Regulations:
1.2.1 Industry Standards: Applicable standards of construction industry have same force and effect on performance of the work as if copied directly into contract documents or bound and pub lished therewith. Standards referenced in contract documents or in governing regulations have precedence over non -referenced standards, insofar as different standards may contain overlapping or conflicting requirements. Comply with standards in effect as of date of contract documents, unless otherwise indicated.
1.2.1.1 Abbreviations: Where abbreviations or acronyms are used in contract documents, they mean the well recognized name of entity in building construction industry; refer uncertainties to Archi tect/Engineer before proceeding, or consult "Encyclopedia of Associations" by Gale Research Co.
1.2.2 Trade Union Jurisdictions : Maintain current information on jurisdictional matters, regulations, actions and pending actions; and administer/supervise performance of work in a manner which will minimize possibility of disputes, conflicts, delays, claims or losses.
END OF SECTION 01 40 00
01 45 00-1
SECTION 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS & DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The work includes te sting laboratory services and inspections required during the course of construction, as specified herein and in other sections of this specification. The Conditions of the Contract and the other sections of Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.
1.2 TESTING LABORATORY:
1.2.1 Required testing and inspections will be performed by an independent testing laboratory selected by the Owner.
1.2.2 Testing and inspection services which are performed shall be in accordance with requirements of the "California Building Code, 2019 (CBC)” and as specified herein. Testing and inspection services shall verify that wo rk meets the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.2.3 Test reports shall be performed by a registered deputy inspector and signed by a Registered Civil Engineer licensed in the State of California.
1.3 PAYMENTS:
1.3.1 Costs of initial testing and i nspection, except as specifically modified hereinafter, or specified otherwise in technical sections, will be paid for by the Owner, providing such testing and inspection indicates compliance with Contract Documents. Initial te sts and inspections are defined as the first tests and inspections as hereinafter specified.
1.3.2 In the event a test or inspection indicates failure of a material or procedure to meet requirements of Contract Documents, costs for retesting and reinspection will be paid by the Owner and backcharged to the Contractor.
1.3.3 Additional tests and inspections not herein specified but requested by Owner or Architect, will be paid for by Owner, unless results of such tests and inspections are found to be not in compliance with Contract Do cuments, in which case the Owner will pay all costs for initial testing as well as retesting and reinspection and backcharge the Contractor.
1.3.4 Costs for additional tests or inspections required because of change in materials being provided or change o f source or supply shall be paid by Contractor direct to testing laboratory.
1.3.5 Costs for work which is required to correct deficiencies shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.3.6 Cost of testing which is required solely for the convenience of Contractor in his scheduling and performance of work shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.3.7 Testing laboratory will separate and identify on the invoices, the costs covering all testing and inspections which are to be backcharged to the Contractor as specified above.
1.3.8 Testing laboratory will furnish to Owner a cost estimate breakdown covering initial tests and inspections required by Contrac t Documents. Estimate will include number of tests, man-hours required for tests, field and plant inspections, travel time, and costs.
1.4 TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS:
1.4.1 Testing laboratory will certify in writing that all work specified or required to be tested and inspected conforms to or does not conform to drawings, specifications and applicable building codes.
1.4.2 The testing laboratory will make the following distribution of all test and inspection reports:
Architect: 2
Structural Engineer: 1
Contractor: 1
Owner: 1
Governing Building Dept.: 1
1.5 REPORTING TEST FAILURES:
Immediately upon testing labor atory determination of a test failure, the laboratory will telephone the results of test to Architect. On the same day, laboratory will send written test results to those named on above distribution list.
1.6 AVAILABILITY OF SAMPLES:
1.6.1 Contractor shall make materials required for testing available to laboratory and assist in acquiring these materials as directed by Architect. The samples shall be taken under the immediate direction and supervision of the testing laboratory.
1.6.2 If work which is req uired to be tested or inspected is covered up without prior notice or approval, such work, may be uncovered at the discretion of Architect.
01 45 00-2
1.6.3 Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall notify testing laboratory a minimum of ten (10) working days in advance of all required tests, and a minimum of two (2) working days in advance of all required inspections. Extra work resulting from a fai lure to notify the laboratory shall be paid for by the Contractor.
1.6.4 Contractor shall give sufficient advance notice to testing laboratory in the event of cancellation or time extension of a scheduled test or inspection. Charges due to insufficient advance notice of cancellations or time extension shall be paid fo r by the Contractor.
1.7 REMOVAL OF MATERIALS:
Unless otherwise directed, materials not conforming to the requirements of Contract Documents shall be promptly removed from t he job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Mock-up Quality Control Field Sample: Contractor shall p rovide as specified in the various Sections a sample of finish work for Architects review. Upon written approval from the Architect, this established quality control sample shall remain on site in a location determined by Contractor for the duration of the work.
END OF SECTION 01 45 00
01 73 29-1
SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Definition: "Cuttting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
1.2 Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and limitations applicable to individual units of work.
1.3 Structural Work: Submit proposal and request and ob tain Architect's/Engineer's approval before proceeding with cut and patch of any structural work. Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of load -carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio.
1.4 Visual/Quality Limitation s: Submit proposal and request and obtain Architects/Engineers approval before proceeding with cut and patch of work. Do not cut and patch work exposed to view (exterior and interior) in a manner resulting in noticeable reductio n of aesthetic qualities and similar qualities, as judged by Architect/Engineer.
1.4.1 Engage the original Installer/Fabricator, or (if not available) an acceptable equivalent entity, to cut and patch the exposed work.
1.5 Limitation on Approvals : Architect's/Engineer's approval to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive right to later require removal/replacement of work found to be cut and patched in an unsatisfactory manner, as judged by Architect/Engineer.
PART 2 - MATERIALS:
2.l General: Use materials for cutting a nd patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials f or cutting and patching that w ill result in equal or better performance characteristics. Repaint enough of existing surface to allow unnoticeable transition or locate logical terminating point as directed by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 Inspection: Before cutting, examine surf aces to be cut and patched and conditions under which the work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding with the work.
3.2 Temporary Support: To prevent failure, provide temporary support of work to be cut.
3.3 Protection: Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of the project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
3.3.1 Avoid interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
3.4 Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with original installer's recommendations.
3.4.1 Where cutting is required, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or core drill. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut and drill from the expos ed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
3.5 Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work.
3.5.1 Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration into retained adjoin ing work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
END OF SECTION 01 73 29
01 74 00-1
SECTION 01 74 00 - CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS & DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The work incl udes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and services, and performing all operations necessary for, and properly incidental to, clean up during construction and final cleaning of the building prior to acceptance by the Owner, including waxing and polishing as specified herein and in other sections when specified. The Conditions of the Contract and the other sections of Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.
1.2 CLEAN UP DURING CONSTRUCTION:
1.2.1 It is required that the entire site be kept in a neat and orderly condition, especially near existing buildings in operation during construction, and the Architect may, at any time during construction, order a general clean up of the site as a part of the work under this section.
1.2.2 Dispose of waste, trash, and debris in a safe, acceptable manner, in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances and as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. Bury no such waste material and debris on the site. Burning of trash and debris on the site will not be permitted.
1.2.3 Location of dump for trash and debris and length of haul is the Contractor's responsibility.
1.3 FINAL SITE CLEAN UP:
Also prior to final inspection, thoroughly clean the entire construction site and put it into a neat, acceptable condition. R emove from the entire site all construction waste and unused materials, dunnage, loose rock and stones, excess earth, roots, weeds, and all debris of any description resulting from the work. Hose down and scrub where necessary all existing concrete and asphalt pavement and w alks dirtied as a result of the work. Thoroughly remove mortar droppings from concrete walks and other pavements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable)
END OF SECTION 01 74 00
01 74 19-1
SECTION 01 74 19 – CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMEMT PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
1.1.1 This section specifies diversion of Construction and Demolition (C&D) waste from the landfill.
1.1.1.1 Waste Management Goals: a minimum of 65% of the total project waste should be diverted from landfill, in order of preference 1) weight, 2) volume, whichever is most feasible to measure.
1.1.1.2 Provide contract documents, including a waste management plan, to show evidence of recycling, and reuse of recovered materials.
1.1.1.3 Inform Owner and architect where Construction and Demolition (C&D) Waste Management requirements could detrimentally impact C&D schedule.
1.1.1.4 Provide separate itemization of cost related to C&D Waste Management.
1.1.1.5 Effect optimum management of solid wastes via a materials management hierarchy.
1.1.1.6 The materials management hierarchy shall be: reduce, reuse, and recycle.
1.1.1.7 Prevent environmental pollution and damage.
1.2 DEFINITIONS:
1.2.1 Inert Fill – A permitted facility that accepts inert waste such as asphalt and concrete exclusively.
1.2.2 Class III Landfill - A landfill that accepts non -hazardous waste such as household, commercial, and industrial waste, including construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.
1.2.3 Construction and Demolition Waste – Including solid wastes, such as building materials, packaging, rubbish, debris, and rubble resulting form construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.
1.2.3.1 Rubbish: Including both combustible and non combustible wastes, such as paper, boxes, glass, crockery, metal and lumber scrap, tin cans, and bones.
1.2.3.2 Debris: Including both combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves and tree trimmings that result from construction or maintenance and repair work.
1.2.4 Weight Conversion Factor – It is the rate set forth in the standardized Weight Conversion Table for the use in estimating the volume or weight of materials identified in the Waste Management Plan.
1.2.5 Deconstruction - The process of rem oving existing building materials from renovation and demolition projects for the purposes of reuse, and recycling, in an efficient and safe manner possible.
1.2.6 Divert – Using material for any purpose other than disposal in a landfill.
1.2.7 Waste Ma terials – Large and small pieces of listed materials which are excess to contract requirements and generally include materials to be recycled and/or recovered from existing construction and items of trimmings, cuttings, and damaged go ods resulting from new installations, which can be effectively used in the Work.
1.2.8 Reuse – Using a material or product that is recovered from construction, renovation, or demolition activities.
1.2.9 Recycling – The process of collecting and preparing recyclable materials in their original form or in manufacturing processes that do not cause the destruction/contamination of recyclable materials in a manner that precludes further use.
1.2.10 Recovery – Any process that reclaims materials, substances , energy, or other p roducts contained within or derived from waste on-site. It includes waste-to-energy, composting, and other processes.
1.2.11 Sources Separation – Sorting the recovered materials into specific material types with no or a minimum amount of contamination on site.
1.2.12 Time-Based Separation – Collecting waste during each phase of construction or deconstruction which results in primarily one major type of recovered material. The material is removed before it becomes mixed with the material from the next p hase of construction.
1.2.13 Commingled or Off-site Separation – Collecting all material types into a single bin or mixed collection system and separating the waste materials into recyclable material types in an off-site facility.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
01 74 19-2
1.3.1 C&D Waste Management Plan Before the start of demolition, submit a C&D waste management plan to the Owner and the architect for approval and it shall include the following:
1.3.1.1 Indicate how the Contractor proposes to recover at least 65% of the C&D wastes for reuse and recycling.
1.3.1.2 The C&D Waste Management Plan should coordinate the recovery effort with the construction, and renovation / demolition schedule.
1.3.1.3 Indicate compliance with section 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE.
1.3.1.3.1 Include a list of reuse facilities, recycling facilities and processing facilities that will be receiving the recovered materials (including take back by Owner or on-site auctions.)
1.3.1.3.2 If some of the materials will be donated or sold on-site auctions, describe the process and identify the organizations that may receive the materials.
1.3.1.3.3 Identify materials that are not recyclable or not recovered which will be disposed of in a landfill (or other means acceptable by the State of California and local ordinance and regulations)and explain why the materials are not recovered.
1.3.1.3.4 List the permitted landfill, or other permitted disposal facilities, that will be accepting the disposed waste materials.
1.3.1.3.5 Indicate instances or situations where compliance with the requirements of this specification do not apply or do not appear to be possible.
1.3.1.3.6 Identify each type of waste material to be reused or recycled and estimate the amount, by weight.
1.3.1.3.7 Provide estimate of time requirements for demolition and for the removal of valuable reusable items and materials.
1.3.1.3.8 Prepare building engineering survey and worker safety plan, assessment of building condition and all potential hazards.
1.3.1.3.9 Provide a C&D site management plan.
1.3.1.3.10Provide final accounting of disposition of recovered materials upon completion of project for final payments.
1.3.2 C&D Waste Management Summary Reports Provide the C&D Quality Manager with delivery receipts for the recovered materials and waste materials sent to the permitted recycling facilities, processing facilities, or landfill with the following information:
1.3.2.1 Name of firm accepting the recovered materials or waste materials
1.3.2.2 Specify type of facility (e.g. retail facility, recycler, processor, Class III landfill, MRF)
1.3.2.3 Location of the facility
1.3.2.4 Type of materials
1.3.2.5 Net weights (or volume) of each type of material
1.3.2.6 Date of delivery
1.3.2.7 Value of the materials or tipping fee paid
1.3.3 Application for Progress Payment The following should be submitted with the Application for Progress Payment:
1.3.3.1 C&D Waste Management Summary Report as stated above in section 1.3 SUBMITTALS, B. C&D Waste Management Summary Reports, with the C&D Quality Manager approval on each of the report.
1.3.3.2 Prepare 3-ring binder with rebate information and product documentation as required for Owner to qualify for rebate program; submit binder with final closeout submittals.
1.3.3.3 Payment could be withheld until diversion goals are met. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for implementation of the C&D Waste Management Plan and achieving the diversion goals.
1.4 RECYCLING PROGRAM:
1.4.1 The recycling program could utilize one or a combination of any of the following common waste diversion strategies:
1.4.1.1 Sources Separation
1.4.1.2 Time-Based Separation
01 74 19-3
1.4.1.3 Commingled or Off-site Separation
1.4.1.4 Back haul of packaging
1.4.1.5 On-site sales auctions and removal
1.4.2 Waste Material management hierarchy can be viewed as: reuse on-site, recycle on-site, reuse off-site, and recycle off-site.
1.4.3 Other innovative approaches to achieve the minimum diversion rate are encouraged and should be specified and described in the C&D Waste Management Plan.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.5.1 Regulatory Requirements
Comply with applicable requirements of the State of California, local ordinances and regulations concerning management of construction, clearing, and inert materials.
1.5.2 Disposal Site, Recyclers and Waste Materials Processors Use only facilities properly permitted by the State of California, and/or by local authorities where applicable.
1.5.3 Pre-C&D Waste Management Meeting
1.5.3.1 Prior to beginning work at the site, schedule and conduct a meeting to review the C&D Waste Management Plan and discuss procedures, schedules, coordination and specific requirements for waste materials recycling and disposal. Discuss coordination and interface between Contractor, sub-contractors, architect, engineers, project manager, Owner, and other C&D activities. Identify and resolve problems of compliance with requirements.
Record minutes of the meeting, identifying conclusions reached and matters requiring further resolution. Maintain waste management as an agenda item at future construction meetings.
1.5.3.2 Attendees: Contractor and related contractor personnel associated with work of this section, including personnel in charge of the waste management program; C&D Quality Manager; architect; engineers; material and equipment suppliers where appropriate; and such additional Owner personnel as Owner deems appropriate.
1.5.3.3 Plan Revision: Make revisions to C&D Waste Management Plan agreed upon during the meeting and incorporate resolutions agreed to be made subsequent to the meeting. Submit revised plan to architect or the Owner personnel as Owner deems appropriate for approval.
1.5.4 Implementation
1.5.4.1 Designate an on -site party responsible for instructing workers and implementing the C&D Waste Management Plan.
1.5.4.2 Distribute copies of C&D Waste Management Plan to job site foreman and each subcontractor.
1.5.4.3 Include waste management and recycling in worker orientation.
1.5.4.4 Provide on-site instruction on appropriate separation, handling, recycling, and recovery methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the work at the site.
1.5.4.5 Also include discussion of waste management and recycling in regular job meeting and jo b safety meetings conducted during the course of work at the site.
1.5.5 The Contractor will be responsible for ensuring that the appropriate governmental entities are notified of the work.
1.5.6 Remove and relocate reusable materials to be reinstalled or retained in a manner to prevent damage or contamination.
1.5.7 Conduct construction and demolition in such a manner to minimize damage to trees, plants and natural landscape environment.
1.5.8 Arrange for adequate collection, and transportation to d eliver the recovered materials to the approved recycling center or processing facility. Maintain records accessible to the architect or C&D Quality Manager for verification of diversion of re covered waste materials.
1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
1.6.1 Site Storage
1.6.1.1 Remove materials for recycling and recovery from the work locations to approved containers or storage area as required. Failure to remove waste or recovered materials will be considered cause for withholding payment and termination of Contract.
01 74 19-4
1.6.1.2 Position containers for recyclable and recoverable waste materials at a designated location on the Project Site. If materials are sorted on site, also provide a sorting area and necessary storage containers.
1.6.1.3 Change-out loaded containers for empty containers, as demand requires.
1.6.1.4 If recovered materials are stored on-site for project duration provide adequate security from pilferage.
1.6.2 Handling
1.6.2.1 Deposit indicated recyclable , and recoverable materials in storage areas or containers in a clean (no mud, adhesive, solvents, petroleum contamination), debris -free condition. Do not deposit contaminated materials into the containers until such time as such materials have been cleaned.
1.6.2.2 Insure all recovered materials are made safe for handling and storage.
1.6.2.3 If the conta mination chemically combines with the material so that it cannot be cleaned, do not deposit into the recycle containers. In such case, request resolution by the C&D Quality Manager for disposal of the contaminated material. Directions from the C&D Qualit y Manager do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements for disposal, nor shall such directions cause a request for modification of the Contract.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
1.7.1 Environmental Requirements:
1.7.1.1 Transport recyclable and recoverable waste materials from the Work Area to containers and carefully deposit in the containers without excess noise and interference with other activities, to minimize noise and dust.
1.7.1.2 The Contractor shall ensure adequate erosion control and storm water control, if required, to prevent or minimize the negative impact to its surrounding environment.
1.7.1.3 Provide measures to insure the containment of lead -based paint and dust, nails, asbestos -based products and any biological contaminants that may affect environmental health and safety conditions.
1.7.2 Site Condition:
1.7.2.1 Signs and instructions should be clear, and easy to understand. All recycling containers should be clearly labeled and lists of acceptable and unacceptable materials will be posted throughout the site. Whenever possible, they should be in multiple-languages, especially in Spanish, and in graphic symbols.
1.7.2.2 The Contractor shall ensure the safety of all personnel involved in the C&D process.
1.7.2.3 A C&D site management plan shall be created including: work areas, materials processing areas, materials storage and disposal areas, worker hand-washing and changing stations, first aid and medical information.
Part 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 RECYCLED MATERIALS:
2.2.1 The following materials are collected for recycling:
2.2.1.1 Ferrous metal
2.2.1.2 Non-ferrous metals: copper, aluminum … etc
2.2.1.3 Untreated lumber
2.2.1.4 Plywood, OSB and particle board
2.2.1.5 Insulation
Part 3 – EXECUTION
N/A
END OF SECTION 01 74 19
01 77 00-1
SECTION 01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL DEFINITIONS
The provisions of this section apply primarily to close out of actual physical work, not to administrative matters such as final pay ment and change- over of insurances. Closeout requirements relate to both final completion and substantial completion of work, and apply to individual portions of completed work as well as the total work. Specific requirements in other sections have precedence over general requirements o f this section.
PART 2 - PROCEDURES AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
2.1 PREREQUISITES:
Comply with General Conditions and complete the following before requesting Architect's inspection of the work, or designated portion thereof, for substantial completion:
2.1.1 Submit executed warr anties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, inspection certificates and similar required documentation for specific units of work, enabling Owner's unrestricted occupancy and use.
2.1.2 Submit record documentation and maintenance manuals.
2.1.3 Complete final cleaning, and remove temporary facilities and tools.
2.2 INSPECTION PROCEDURES:
Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled.
Following initial ins pection, Architect will either prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior to issuance of certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantia lly completed. Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch list" for final acceptance.
2.3 PROCEDURES AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE:
2.3.1 Reinspection Procedure : Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that work has been completed, including punch list items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, Architect will reinspect work. Upon completion of reinspection, Architect will either recommend final acceptance and final payment, or advis e Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repea ted.
2.3.2 Record Documentation:
2.3.2.1 Record Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain at the job site, accessible to the Archi tect one set of black line prints:
2.3.2.1 Show all changes in the Work.
2.3.2.2 Make all entries within 24 hours after installing any part of the Work. Progress payments will not be certified unless this is complied with, and the Job Inspector has signed (monthly) the record set of prints.
2.3.2.3 Reproducible "Record" Drawings: Upon completion of the work and before final inspection, a completely updated record set used during construction, shall be submitted to the Architect. Architect shall select a competent draftsman to make changes on the original project files. After original drawings are corrected, one set of electronic files will be made. Record Civil documentation shall be provided separately and shall not be part of this allowance.
2.3.3 Record Specifications : Maintain a complete set of specifications for record mark -up purposes. Mark -up during course of work to show changes sufficient to form a complete record for Owner's purposes and Architect's review. Date and sign each mark-up.
2.3.4 Maintenance Manuals : Provide 3 -ring vinyl-covered binders containing required maintenance manuals, properly identified and indexed. Include maintenance instructions; warranties, inspection procedures, diagrams, safety, and similar appropriate data for each system or item.
2.3.5 Extra Materials: Extra materials as required by other Sections of the Document, shall be properly packaged and labeled, then delivered to the Owner.
2.4 FINAL CLEANING:
Clean up as specified in section 01 74 00.
END OF SECTION 01 77 00
01 78 39 - 1
SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.
2. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Submit set of marked -up record prints for each project. Provide one (1) paper copy and one (1) digital copy in PDF format on compact disc.
B. Record Specifications: Submit set of marked -up Project's Specifications, f or each project, including addenda and contract modifications. Provide one (1) paper copy and one (1) digital copy in PDF format on compact disc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one (1) full size set of marked -up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, for each project, depicting the current status of the Work.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtain ed record data, whether individual or entity is installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked -up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Content: Types of ite ms requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
01 78 39 - 2
c. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive or Architect’s Supplemental Instructions.
d. Changes made following Architect's written orders
e. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
f. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. g. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. h. Changes made by requests for information (RFI’s).
3. Mark the Contract Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked -up record prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive or Architect's Supplemental Instructions, numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, Request for Information numbers, Submittal numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked - up record prints with Project Architect.
C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location for each project.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation whe re installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
B. Format: Submit Record Specifications as paper copy and electronic files.
2.3 OTHER RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain the following items:
1. Change Orders and Field Work Orders approved by the Client and all other modifications to the Contract Documents, for each project.
2. Submittals reviewed by the Architect, for each project.
3. Material Safety Data Sheets (“MSDS”) accompanying any materials, equipment or products delivered or stored at the Site or incorporated into the Work and applicable parts of Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations. Provide for each project.
01 78 39 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Upon completion of the Work, all documents maintained at the Site by the Contractor pursuant to the foregoing shall be assembled and promptly transmitted to the Architect for delivery to the Client.
B. The failure or refusal of the Contractor to continuously maintain complete and accurate Record Drawings for each separate project, or to make available the Record Drawings for inspection and review by the Client, may be deemed by the Client to be Contractor’s default of a material obligation in which event all fees and costs incurred or associated with such action shall be charged to the Contractor and deducted from any portion of the Contract Price due.
C. The Record Drawings shall conform with the following standards:
1. Dimensions shall be given from easily identifiable permanent reference points.
D. Recording: Maintain one (1) copy of each submittal, for each project, during the Construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
E. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Separate docum ents for each project. Provide access to project record documents for Client’s, Project Manager’s, or Architect’s reference during normal working hours.
F. The Contractor shall incorporate an index into the Record Drawing sets, for each project.
The index sh all reflect the following information obtained from the drawing title block:
drawing number, drawing date of issue and drawing last date of revision.
G. Review Rec ord Documents for each project weekly with Project Architect. Indicate to Project Architect the items incorporated in Project Record Documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including modifications, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.
END OF SECTION 01 78 39
02 00 01-1
SECTION 02 00 01 DEMOLITION, ALTERATIONS and SALVAGING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK:
The work includes demolition, alteration and salvage work, required by the respective Sections, generally but not limited to the following:
1.1.1 All temporary work re quired, including the protection of existing construction and finishes, temporary enclosures for openings in existing walls and other precautions as may be required or deemed necessary to prevent damages.
1.1.2 Cutting and patching for and after the installatio n of new construction, equipment, finishes and the like under the work of the Contract.
1.1.3 Salvaging and reusing or storing existing materials, equipment, fixtures, etc., where shown and as specified.
1.1.4 All required shoring, bracing, underpinning, etc. that m ay be required to complete the work of the Contract in a safe and workmanlike manner.
1.2 DAMAGE:
Should any portion of the existing site or building be damaged due to Contractor's operations, the Contractor shall report the conditions and circumstances to the Architect and all necessary repairs and replacement to such damaged work shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. All such repairs and replacements to such damaged work shall be with new materials to match existing work in every respect to meet the approval of the Architect.
1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS:
The Contractor shall verify dimensions and conditions on the job so that all work will properly join the existing work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVALS:
3.1.1 Existing construction and finishes shall be removed as required for the execution of the work under the contract. Such work shall be done in a manner so as to avoid damage to construction and finishes that are to remain and not be demolished.
3.1.2 Materials resulting from removal operations shall not be allowed to accumulate on the site, in the buildings or the premises, but shall be promptly removed and disposed of off site at the appropriate locations.
3.2 SALVAGE:
3.2.1 Existing items of work indicated on the dra wings or specified to be re -used and relocated shall be removed with extreme care and stored and protected by the Contractor until incorporated in the new work. Any damage to the items caused by demoli tion, storage or re-installation shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.2.2 All existing equipment scheduled to be salvaged and reused shall be in working condition upon completion of work under this contract. The Contractor shall make all repairs required to leave the equipment in working order.
3.2.3 All existing items scheduled to be removed shall be disposed of.
3.3 CLEAN-UP:
The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all existing surfaces in all areas where demolition or alteration work has been perform ed.
Cleaning of surfaces shal l include, but not be limited to ; walls, glass, aluminum frames and trim , all painted wood and metal, landscape, irrigation, and hardscape surfaces.
END OF SECTION 02 00 01
02 41 19 - 1
SECTION 02 41 19- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
1.1.1 This Section includes demolition and removal of the following:
1.1.1.1 Selected portions of a building or structure.
1.1.1.2 Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
1.1.2 See individual Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating items.
1.2 DEFINITIONS:
1.2.1 Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
1.2.2 Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and submit them to the Owner ready for reuse.
1.2.3 Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.
1.2.4 Existing to Remain : Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP:
1.3.1 Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwi se indicated to remain Owner’s property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
1.4.1 Submit the following as per Section 01 33 00, Submittals:
1.4.1.1 Proposed Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are la ter determined to be inadequate. Include measures for the following:
1.4.1.1.1 Dust control.
1.4.1.1.2 Noise control.
1.4.2 Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities : Indicate detailed sequence of se lective demolition and removal W ork, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporar y partitions and means of egress.
1.4.3 Predemolition Photographs : Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site i mprovements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.5.1 Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
1.5.2 Regulatory Requirements : Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition.
Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5.3 Standards: Comply with the latest edition of the following:
1.5.3.1 ANSI / ASSE A10.6 - American National Standards Institute / American Society of Safety Engineers, “Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations”
1.5.3.2 NFPA 241 - National Fire Protection Association, “ Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations”
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
1.6.1 Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Cond uct selective demolition so that Owner operations will not be disrupted. Submit no less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner operations.
1.6.2 Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
1.6.2.1 Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained bythe Owner as far as practical. 02 41 19 - 2
1.6.3 Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1.6.3.1 If materials suspected o f containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and the Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by the Owner under a separate contract.
1.6.4 Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
1.6.5 Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.6.5.1 Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.7 WARRANTY:
1.7.1 Existing Warranties : Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
1.7.1.1 If possible, re tain original Installer or fabricator to patch the exposed Work listed below that is damaged during selective demolition. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS:
2.1.1 Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
2.1.1.1 If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2.1.1.2 Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
3.1.1 Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
3.1.2 Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
3.1.3 Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.
3.1.4 When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or s tructural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report tothe Architect.
3.1.5 Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES:
3.2.1 Existing Utilities : M aintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
3.2.2 Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by the Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the Owner and the authorities having jurisdiction.
3.2.2.1 Submit at least 72 hours' notice to the Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.
3.3 PREPARATION:
3.3.1 Site Access and Temporary Controls : Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
3.3.1.1 Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from the Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
3.3.1.2 Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3.1.2.1 Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
3.3.2 Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
02 41 19 - 3
3.3.3 Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for prote ction of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weather -tight enclosure for building exterior.
3.3.4 Temporary Shoring: Provid e and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement o r collapse of construction being demolished.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS:
3.4.1 Dust Control: Use water mist or sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
3.4.2 Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
3.4.2.1 Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
3.4.3 Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations.
Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION:
3.5.1 General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations.
3.5.1.1 Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, squar e, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
3.5.1.2 Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
3.5.1.3 Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations.
Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
3.5.1.4 Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
3.5.2 Existing Facilities: Comply with Owner's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations.
3.5.3 Removed and Salvaged Items:
3.5.3.1 Clean salvaged items.
3.5.3.2 Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3.5.3.3 Store items in a secure area until delivery to the Owner.
3.5.3.4 Transport items to the Owner’sstorage area designated by the Owner.
3.5.3.5 Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
3.5.4 Removed and Reinstalled Items:
3.5.4.1 Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment.
3.5.4.2 Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3.5.4.3 Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
3.5.4.4 Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment.
Submit connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
3.5.5 Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition.
When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitab le, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS:
3.6.1 General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.
3.6.2 Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 02 41 19 - 4
3.6.3 Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration int o adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS:
3.7.1 General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
3.7.2 Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.7.3 Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner’sproperty and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 02 41 19
07 01 50-1
SECTION 07 01 50 - PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 Section Includes:
1.1.1.1 Roof replacement preparation of entire roof system.
1.1.1.2 Removal of roof membrane and base flashings..
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.2.1 Re-roofing preparation Work consists of the following:
1.2.1.1 Preparation for all low slope roof areas:
1.2.1.1.1 Preparation for: Roof replacement.
1.2.1.1.2 Existing Roof Type: Granular surfaced modified bituminous.
1.2.1.1.3 Existing Deck Type: Wood deck.
1.2.1.1.4 Removal of base flashings.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
1.3.1 Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, reinstall ed, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.4.1 Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 "Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing" and glossary in applicable edition of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.4.2 Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of t hem off-site unless indicated to be removed and reinstalled.
1.4.3 Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not indicated to be removed.
1.4.4 Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.
1.4.5 Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.
1.4.6 Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Regulatory Requirements:
1.5.1.1 Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning membrane roofing removal.
1.5.1.2 Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 PROJECT / FIELD CONDITIONS
1.6.1 Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area.
1.6.1.1 Conduct reroofing so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
1.6.1.2 Provide Owner with not less than 48 hours' written notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations.
1.6.1.3 Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to evacuate occupants from below the affected area.
1.6.1.3.1 Verify that occupants below the work area have been evacuated before proceeding with work over the impaired deck area.
1.6.2 Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations.
07 01 50-2
1.6.3 Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1.6.4 1Retain first paragraph below if limiting construction loads on existing roof deck and building structure. Revise to suit Project.
Limit construction loads on roof to rooftop equipment wheel loads and uniformly distributed loads.
1.6.5 Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or building.
1.6.5.1 Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day.
1.6.6 Daily Protection: Coordinate installation of roofing so insulation and other components of roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
1.6.7 Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials such as asbestos-containing materials will be encountered in the Work.
1.6.7.1 If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION, GENERAL
3.1.1 Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted.
3.1.1.1 Immediately notify Owner of any blockages or restrictions.
3.1.2 Pollution Control: Comply with environmental regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Limit spread of dust and debris.
3.1.2.1 Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
3.1.2.2 Remove debris from building roof by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level.
3.1.3 Temporary Weather Protection: During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on -site to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain.
3.1.4 Roof Drain Protection: Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday.
3.1.4.1 Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors.
3.1.4.1.1 Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose.
3.1.4.1.2 Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.
3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF
3.2.1 Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear-off proposed for that day.
3.2.2 Lower removed roofing materials to ground and onto lower roof levels, using dust-tight chutes or other acceptable means of removing materials from roof areas.
3.2.3 Roof Tear-Off: Remove existing roofing membrane and other membrane roofing system components down to the deck.
3.2.3.1 Remove all perimeter, curb and projection base flashings to substrate, properly remove and dispose.
3.2.4 Inspect wood blocking, curbs, and nailers for deterioration and damage.
3.2.4.1 Replace existing wood components that exhibit signs ofdeterioration or other conditions detrimental to securement of roofing system components, including roof edge flashings.
3.2.4.2 Reuse of Existing Wood Nailers: Permitted where type, size and securement are in accordance with Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Bulletin 1-49; and existing wood nailers exhibit no signs of deterioration or other conditions detrimental to securement of new roofing system in conformance with specified requirements.
3.3 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION
07 01 50-3
3.3.1 General: Remove, store, protect and reinstall rooftop equipment as required to accommodate roof tear -off and subsequent roofing work.
3.3.1.1 Raise roof curbs, equipment mountings and other roof penetration flashings as required to accommodate additional insulation thickness and maintain base flashing height of not less than 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
3.3.1.1.1 Provide wood assemblies and additional support with miscellaneous galvanized steel angles, as required to rebuild or raise existing roof curbs.
3.3.1.1.2 Extend vent and soil stacks and other roof penetrations, using matching materials, as required to accommodate additional insulation thickness.
3.4 BASE FLASHING REMOVAL
3.4.1 Do not damage metal counterflashings that are to remain.
3.4.1.1 Replace metal counterflashings damaged during removal with counterflashings of same metal, weight or thickness, and finish.
3.5 DISPOSAL
3.5.1 Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
3.5.1.1 Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not permitted.
3.5.2 Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property.
3.6 CLEANING
3.6.1 Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by preparation for re-roofing operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before operations began.
END OF SECTION 07 01 50
07 41 13 -1
SECTION 07 41 13 - METAL ROOF PANELS, STANDING SEAM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 Section Includes:
1.2.1.1 Architectural standing-seam metal roof panels.
1.2.1.2 Metal roof accessories.
1.2.1.3 Roof insulation.
1.2.1.4 Miscellaneous metal framing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, a ttachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
1.4.1 Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4.1.1 Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, metal roof panel Installer, metal roof panel manufacturer's representative, substrate Installer, and installers whose work interfaces wi th or affects metal roof panels including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment.
1.4.1.2 Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
1.4.1.3 Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
1.4.1.4 Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.
1.4.1.5 Review structural loading limitations of substrate during and after roofing.
1.4.1.6 Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels.
1.4.1.7 Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and inspecting if applicable.
1.4.1.8 Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof panel assembly during and after installation.
1.4.1.9 Review roof observation and repair procedures after metal roof panel installation.
1.4.1.10 Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.5.1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of roof panel and accessory.
1.5.2 LEED Submittals:
1.5.2.1 Product Test Reports for Credit SS 7 .2: For roof panels, indicating that panels comply with solar reflectance index requirement.
1.5.2.2 Product Data for Credit MR 4: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content.
1.5.2.2.1 Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
1.5.3 Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side -seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchora ges, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details specific to project, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Indicate point of fixity of metal panels.
Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.
1.5.4 Accessory Details: Include details of the following items:
1.5.4.1 Flashing and trim.
1.5.4.2 Pipe penetration flashings.
1.5.4.3 Roof curbs.
1.5.4.4 Gutters.
1.5.4.5 Downspouts.
1.5.5 Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the metal roof panel manufacturer's qualified professional engineer re sponsible for their preparation. Include the following:
1.5.5.1 Structural analysis data indicating compliance with Performance Requirements Article. 07 41 13 -2
1.5.6 Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal roof panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.
1.5.6.1 Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
1.5.7 Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1.5.7.1 Metal Roof Panels: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, cli ps, closures, and other metal roof panel accessories.
1.6.7.2 Trim and Closures: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
1.5.7.3 Accessories: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for each type of accessory.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Qualification Data: For manufacturer, Installer, professional engineer, and manufacturer's technical representative.
1.6.1.1 Submit Installer qualifications in the form of an original letter on manufacturer's letterhead signed by authorized manufacturer representative.
1.6.2 Material Certificates: For thermal insulation, from manufacturer.
1.6.3 Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. Indicate compliance with requirements in Performance Requirements Article:
1.6.3.1 Air Infiltration.
1.6.3.2 Water Penetration.
1.6.3.3 Hydrostatic-Head Resistance.
1.6.3.4 Wind-Uplift Resistance.
1.6.3.5 FM Approvals Listing.
1.6.3.6 Solar Reflectance.
1.6.3.7 Minimum Emissivity Rating.
1.6.4 Field Quality Control Reports.
1.6.5 Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.7.1 Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.8.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer of plant -fabricated metal roof panel systems listed in this Section and meeting performance requirements, with a minimum of five years' experience providing metal roof panel systems for projects of similar type and scope, offering engineering, warranty, technical inspection, and maintenance inspection services specified.
1.8.2 Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and certified by manufacturer, including a full -time on-site supervisor with a minimum of five years' experienc e installing similar work, able to communicate verbally with Contractor, Architect, and employees, and qualified by the manufacturer to furnish warranty of type specified.
1.8.3 Manufacturer's On-Site Roll Former Operators: Experienced full-time employees of metal roof panel manufacturer.
1.8.4 Professional Engineer Qualification: A qualified professional engineer licensed in the project state, and experienced in metal roof panel system design similar to that required for Project.
1.8.5 UL-Certified, Portab le Roll -Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll -forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory -formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll -forming equipment for duration of work.
1.8.6 Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized full -time employee representative of manufacturer, certified as a Registered Roof Observer by the Roof Consultants Institute, and experienced in the installation and maintenanc e of the specified roof panel system and qualified to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements of this Project.
1.8.7 Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing and inspection indicated.
1.8.7.1 Inspection personnel shall be certified as a Registered Roof Observer by the Roof Consultants Institute, and shall be experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system and qualified to determine Ins taller's compliance with the requirements of this Project.
1.8.8 Source Limitations: Obtain metal roof panels and accessories and related engineered structural support members from a single source supplied or approved by metal roof panel manufacturer.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.9.1 Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed.
Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling.
1.9.2 Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. 07 41 13 -3
1.9.3 Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1.9.4 Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.
1.9.5 Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows:
1.9.5.1 Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic insulation materials to Project site before installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.10.1 Weather Limitations: Proceed with inst allation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous w ith metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication.
1.11 COORDINATION
1.11.1 Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.
Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of substrate, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
Air Barrier Coordination: Coordinate installation of roofing insulation with installation of wall air barrier system wall -to-roof transition material specified in Division 07 Section air barrier section to provide a continuous air barrier across roofing and adjacent assemblies.
1.12 WARRANTY
1.12.1 Manufacturer's Warranty: Roof System Manufacturer's s tandard form in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period, as follows.
1.12.1.1 Form of Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty form.
1.12.1.2 Scope of Warran ty: Work of this Section and including sheet metal details and termination details installed by the roof system Installer and approved by the Roof System Manufacturer.
1.12.1.3 Warranty Period: 30 years from date of completion.
1.12.2 Extended Roof System Components: Warranties specified in this roofing Section include the following components and systems specified in other sections supplied by the roofing system Manufacturer, and installed by the roofing system Installe r, except where separate warranty terms and conditions appear in the referenced section.
1.12.2.1 Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim": Shop formed sheet metal flashing items including roof penetration flashings.
1.12.3 Installer Warranty: Installer's warranty signed by Installer, as follows.
1.12.3.1 Form of Warranty: Form acceptable to Roofing Manufacturer and Owner.
1.12.3.2 Scope of Warranty: Work of this Section.
1.12.3.3 Warranty Period: 5 years from date of completion.
1.12.4 Manufacturer Inspection and Preventive Maintenance Service: To report maintenance responsibilities necessary for preservation of Owner's warranty rights and to perform periodic routine maintenance required, as described in Manufacturer's standard form. The cost of manufacturer's inspections and preventive maintenance is included in the Contract Sum.
1.12.4.1 Scope of Service: Manufacturer's standard form.
Inspections to occur in following years: 2, 5, 10, 15, 20 and 25 following completion.
1.12.5 Metal Finishes: Written warranty in which Manufacturer agree s to repair finish or replace factory -finished components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes under normal atmospheric conditions within specified warranty period.
1.25.5.1 Color fading, ASTM D 2244: Greater than 5 Hunter units.
1.25.5.2 Chalking, ASTM D 4214: Greater than a No. 8 rating.
1.25.5.3 Finish breakdown: Cracking, checking, peeling, or adhesive failure.
1.25.5.4 Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.2.1 General Performance : Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
2.2.2 Delegated Design: Design m etal roof panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
2.2.3 Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one -half of preconsumer recycled content not less 07 41 13 -4
than 25 percent.
2.2.4 Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies and related engineered structural support members specified in Division 05 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" withstanding the eff ects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
2.2.4.1 Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2.2.4.2 Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2.2.5 Hail Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies listed with UL as Class 4 hail resistant panels.
2.2.6 Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than the following when tested according to ASTM E 1680, based upon 16 inch (406 mm) wide panel:
2.2.6.1 Maximum 0.0001 cfm/sq. ft. (0.001 L/s x sq. m) of roof area at test-pressure difference of - 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.( -75.2 Pa).
2.2.6.2 Maximum 0.0028 cfm/sq. ft. (0.0028 L/s x sq. m) of roof area at test -pressure difference of - 20.00 lbf/sq. ft.(- 958 Pa).
2.2.7 Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the following test - pressure difference:
2.2.7.1 Test-Pressure Difference: 20.00 lbf/sq. ft. (958 Pa).
2.2.8 Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.
2.2.9 Thermal Move ments: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss.
2.2.9.1 Temperature Change (Range): [120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C)], material surfaces.
2.3 ARCHITECTURAL STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
2.3.1 General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cl eats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.
2.3.1.1 Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514.
2.3.2 Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Factory-formed symmetrical panels with vertical ribs at panel edges and flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation in e ither direction by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming pane ls together utilizing a seam cap, and configured to enable future replacement of individual panels without disturbing adjacent panels.
2.3.2.1 Basis-of-Design Product: The roof system specified in this Section is based upon products of Tremco, Inc., Beachwood, OH, (800) 562 -2728, www.tremcoroofing.com that are named in other Part 2 articles, or architects approved equal.
Tremco, Inc., TremLock T-238 (UL Listing TGFU.R6692).
2.3.2.2 Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 50 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grad e 340), prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M; structural quality.
2.3.2.2.1 Thickness: 0.0236-inch/24 ga. (0.71-mm) minimum thickness.
2.3.2.2.2 Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
2.3.2.2.3 Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 2-Coat Fluoropolymer.
2.3.2.2.4 Exposed Finish: Exposed metallic coating.
2.3.2.2.5 Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors meeting energy performance requirements.
2.3.2.3 Clips: Low-movement floating clips to accommodate thermal movem ent; fixed clips where design permits; intermittent or continuous clips as required to meet performance requirements; and with clip bearing plate where required.
2.3.2.3.1 Material: 0.064-inch- (1.63-mm-) nominal thickness, zinc -coated (galvanized) or alum inum-zinc alloy - coated steel sheet.
2.3.2.4 Joint Type: Field mechanically seamed, with continuous factory-applied sealant.
2.3.2.5 Seam Cap: Match panel material and finish; provide with two rows of integral factory hot-applied sealant.
2.3.2.6 Panel Pan Configuration: Striated.
2.3.2.7 Panel Seam Height: Not less than 2-3/8 inch (60.3 mm).
2.3.2.8 Panel Coverage: 18 inches (457 mm).
2.4 METAL ROOF ACCESSORIES
2.4.1 Metal Roof Accessories, General : Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets , fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless oth erwise indicated.
2.4.1.1 Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. 07 41 13 -5
2.4.1.2 Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.
2.4.2 Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, b ut are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same f inish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
2.4.3 Pipe Penetration Flashings: Flexible boot type, with stainless steel compression ring, and stainless steel pipe strap. Use silicone-type boot at hot pipes.
2.4.4 Gutters: Formed from same material roof panels. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches (900 mm) o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels.
2.4.5 Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10 -foot- (3-m-) long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness accord ing to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish downspouts to match gutters.
2.4.6 Pipe Penetration Flashing: Premolded EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base and stainless steel pipe clamp to secure collar to pipe.
2.4.7 Roof Curbs: Fabricated from aluminum sheet, minimum 0.080 inch (1.2 mm) thick; with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles, and welded top box, integral internal fastener flange, and water diverter. Fabricate curb subframing of minim um 0.0598- inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, angle -, C-, or Z -shaped galvanized steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads, of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels.
2.4.7.1 Insulate roof curb with 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, rigid insulation.
2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
2.5.1 Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
2.5.1.1 Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2.5.1.2 Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DensDeck Prime by Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
2.5.2 Substrate-Board Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion -resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to substrate.
2.6 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
2.6.1 Self-Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet : 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick minimum, consisting of slip -resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS -modified asphalt adhesive, with release -paper backing; cold applied.
Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Underlayment shall be approved by metal roof system manufacturer.
2.6.1.1 Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 1970.
2.6.1.2 Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C); ASTM D 1970.
2.6.2 Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
2.7.1 Zee Clips: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.
2.7.2 Base or Sill Channels: (2.01-mm) 0.079-inch nominal thickness.
2.7.3 Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
2.7.3.1 Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.
2.7.4 Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.8.1 Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self -locking rivets and bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching colo r of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
2.9 FABRICATION
2.9.1 Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufact urer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and w ith dimensional and structural requirements.
2.9.2 On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on -site using 07 41 13 -6
UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory -formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.
2.9.3 Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
2.9.4 Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory -installed captive gaskets or sep arator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
2.9.5 Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommend ations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
2.9.5.1 Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks an d that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2.9.5.2 Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
2.9.5.3 Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.10 FINISHES
2.10.1 Comply with NAAMM' s "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2.10.2 Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.10.3 Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.10.4 Steel Panels and Accessories:
2.10.4.1 Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2.10.4.2 Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light -colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.1.1.1 Examine solid roof substrate to verify that substrate joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3.1.1.2 Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation.
3.1.1.3 For the record, p repare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
3.1.1.4 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 Clean substrates of substances harmfu l to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment.
3.2.2 Properly remove and dispose of existing roof system down to wood deck.
3.3.3 Substrate Board: Install substrate boards over roof substrate on entire roof surface. Attach with substrate-board fasteners.
3.3.3.1 Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
3.3.3.2 Comply with requirements for fire-rated construction.
3.3.4 Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3 -1/2 inches (90 mm). Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
3.3.1.1 Apply over entire roof surface.
3.3.2 Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. 07 41 13 -7
3.3.3 Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashi ng and Trim."
3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
3.4.1 Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations.
3.4.2 Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structu re at one and only one location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners.
3.4.2.1 Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at ridge.
3.4.2.2 Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement.
3.4.3 Install metal roof panels as follows:
3.4.3.1 Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. (27.8 sq. m) in presence of facto ry- authorized representative.
3.4.3.2 Field cutting of metal panels by torch or abrasive saw is not permitted.
3.4.3.3 Install panels perpendicular to supporting purlins.
3.4.3.4 Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
3.4.3.5 Provide metal closures at rake edges, rake walls, and each side of ridge and hip caps.
3.4.3.6 Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings.
3.4.3.7 Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.
3.4.3.8 End Splices: Locate panel end splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel end splices to avoid a four-panel splice condition.
3.4.3.9 Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels.
3.4.4 Fasteners:
3.4.4.1 Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
3.4.5 Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components o f the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.
3.4.6 Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3.4.6.1 Use slip sheet where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
3.4.7 Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3.4.7.1 Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3.4.7.2 Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
3.5.1 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing -seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
3.5.1.1 Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
3.5.1.2 Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3.5.1.3 Erection Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (1:960) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 inch (3 mm) offset of splices and alignment of matching profiles.
3.5.1.4 Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer -approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
3.5.1.5 Watertight Installation:
3.5.1.5.1 Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal jo ints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight.
3.5.1.5.2 Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.
3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
3.6.1 General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting
3.6.1.1 Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
3.6.2 Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3.6.2.1 Form trim and transition joints using compressed joints with captive butyl sealant capable of resisting static water pressure. Cleated joints and exposed joint sealants do not meet this requirement. 07 41 13 -8
3.6.2.2 Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
3.6.2.3 Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no j oints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
3.6.3 Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped, riveted, and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. using ma nufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.
3.6.4 Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between.
3.6.4.1 Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
3.6.4.2 Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
3.6.5 Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels.
3.6.6 Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.
3.6.7 Bar-Type Snow Guards: Attach bar supports to vertical ribs of standing -seam metal roof panels with clamps or set screws in array recommended by snow guard manufacturer. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roof panels.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.7.1 Manufacturer’s Technical Representative: Engage a qualified manufacturer’s technical representative acceptable to Owner for a minimum of 7 full -time days on site to perform substrate examination, interim observations, and f inal roof inspections, and to prepare reports.
3.7.2 Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
3.7.3 Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be perform ed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.8 CLEANING
3.8.1 Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's wr itten installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
3.8.2 Replace metal roof panels that have been dama ged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 41 13
07 54 16-1
SECTION 07 54 16 - KETONE ETHYLENE ESTER (KEE) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 Section Includes:
1.1.1.1 Adhered thermoplastic KEE roofing system on a prepared existing roof substrate, including:
1.1.1.2 Base Sheet
1.1.1.3 Roof insulation.
1.1.1.4 Roof insulation cover board.
1.1.1.5 Walkway material.
1.1.2 Related Sections:
1.1.2.1 Division 07 Section "Preparation for Re-Roofing"
1.1.2.2 Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop -formed sheet metal items including roof draina ge system items, roof penetration flashings, base and counterflashings and reglets, and formed copings and roof edge metal items.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 "Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing" an d glossary in applicable edition of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
1.3.1 Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3.1.1 Meet with Owner, Architect, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment.
1.3.1.2 Review drawings and specifications.
1.3.1.3 Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
1.3.1.4 Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel , equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
1.3.1.5 Examine substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.
1.3.1.6 Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
1.3.1.7 Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
1.3.1.8 Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
1.3.1.9 Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
1.3.1.10 Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4.2 Sustainable Design Submittals:
1.4.1.1 Product Test Reports for Solar Reflectance: For roof materials, indicating that roof materials comply with Solar Reflectance Index requirement.
1.4.1.2 Product Data and L aboratory Test Reports: For adhesives and sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low-VOC/low-emitting materials.
1.4.3 Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.4.3.1 Base flashings and membrane terminations.
1.4.3.1.1 Indicate details meet requirements of NRCA and FMG required by this Section.
1.4.2.2 Tapered insulation for crickets.
1.4.3.3 Roof plan showing types and orientation of roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing and fastening spacings 07 54 16-2
and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing if applicable.
1.4.4. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1.4.4.1 Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.
1.4.4.2 Walkway pads or rolls.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.5.1 Contractor's Product Certificate : Submit certificate, indicating products intended for Work of this Section, including product names and numbers and manufacturers' names, with statement indicating that products to be provided meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.5.2 Qualification Data: For Installer, Manufacturer and Roofing Inspector.
1.5.2.1 Include letter from Manufacturer written for this Project indicating approval of Installer.
1.5.3 Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1.5.3.1 Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
1.5.3.1.1 Include: UL listing certificate.
1.5.3.2 Product Compatibility: Indicate manufacturer has verified compatibility of roofing system components, including but not limited to: Roofing membrane, flashing sheets, adhesives, and sealants.
1.5.4 Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.
1.5.5 Warranties: Unexecuted sample copies of special warranties.
1.5.6 Inspection Reports : Reports o f Roofing Inspector. Include weather conditions, description of work performed, tests performed, defective work observed, and corrective actions taken to correct defective work.
1.5.6.1 Submit reports within 48 hours after inspection.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Executed copies of warranties.
1.6.2 Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7.1 Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and certified by manufacturer, including a full -time on-site supervisor with a minimum of five years' experience installing products comparable to those specified, able to communicate verbally with Contractor, Architect, and employees, and qualified by the manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and furnish warrant y of type specified.
1.7.2 Manufacturer Qualifications : Approved manufacturer listed in this Section, UL listed for roofing systems comparable to that specified for this Project, with minimum five years' experience in manufacture of thermoplastic roof membrane products in successful use in similar applications.
1.7.3 Roofing Inspector Qualifications : A technical representative of manufacturer not engaged in the sale of products and experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system, qualified to perform roofing observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control Article, to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements of this Project, and ap proved by the manufacturer to issue warranty certification. The Roofing Inspector shall be one of the following:
1.7.3.1 An authorized full-time technical employee of the manufacturer.
1.7.3.2 An independent party certified as a Registered Roof Observer by the International Institute of Building Enclosure Consultants (formerly th e Roof Consultants Institute) retained by the Contractor or the Manufacturer and approved by the Manufacturer.
1.7.4 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on -site access to manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.8.1 Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or li sting agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
1.8.2 Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
1.8.2.1 Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. 07 54 16-3
1.8.3 Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by su nlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and prote cting during installation.
1.8.4 Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.
1.9 PROJECT / FIELD CONDITIONS
1.9.1 Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.9.2 Daily Protection: Coordinate installation of roofing so insulation and other components of roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
1.9.2.1 Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing and insulation with a course of roofing sheet securely in place with joints and edges sealed.
1.9.2.2 Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing.
1.9.3 Remove temporary plugs from roof drains at end of each day.
1.9.4 Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
1.10 WARRANTY
1.10.1 Manufacturer's Warranty : Roof System Manufacturer's standard form in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period, as follows.
1.10.1.1 Form of Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty form.
1.10.1.2 Scope of Warranty : Work of this Section and including sheet metal details and termination details installed by the roof system Installer and approved by the Roof System Manufacturer.
1.10.1.3 Warranty Period: 30 years from date of completion.
1.10.1.4 Manufacturer shall provide sole source warranty for low slope (KEE Membrane ) and Steep Slope ( Standing Seam Metal - Section SECTION 074113.07 ) roof areas.
1.10.2 Manufacturer Inspection Services : By manufacturer's techni cal representative, to report maintenance responsibilities to Owner necessary for preservation of Owner's warranty rights. The cost of manufacturer's inspections is included in the Contract Sum.
1.10.2.1 Inspections to occur in following years: 2, 5, 10, 15, 20 and 25 following completion.
1.10.3 Installer Warranty: Installer's warranty signed by Installer, as follows.
1.10.3.1 Form of Warranty: Form acceptable to Roofing Manufacturer and Owner.
1.10.3.2 Scope of Warranty: Work of this Section.
1.10.3.3 Warranty Period: 5 years from date of completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1 Basis of Design: The roof system specified in this Section is based upon products of Tremco, Inc., Beachwood, OH, (800) 562-2728, www.tremcoroofing.com that are named in other Part 2 articles, or architects approved equal.
2.2.2 Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.2.1 General Performance : Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other d efects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
2.2.1.1 Accelerated Weathering : Roofing system shall withstand 10,000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155.
2.2.1.2 Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D3746/D3746M, ASTM D4272/D4272M, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470.
2.2.2 Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to system s that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency in accordance with ANSI/FM 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897, and to resist uplift pressures calculated in accordance with ASCE-7 and applicable code.
2.2.3 Exterior Fire -Test Exposur e: ASTM E108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings o f applicable 07 54 16-4
testing agency.
2.2.4 Fire-Resistance Ratings : Comply with fire -resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.2.5 Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance index of not less than 0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL
2.3.1 Material Compatibility : Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2.4 BASE SHEET
2.4.1 Nailed G2 Base sheet over wood deck. Burmastic Glass Ply 33# by Tremco.
2.5 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE MATERIALS
2.5.1 KEE Roof Membrane:
2.5.1.1 Thermoplastic Ketone Ethylene Ester (KEE) coated polyester fabric-reinforced sheet, ASTM D6754.
2.5.1.1.1 Basis of design product: Tremco, TremPly KEE FB Single Ply Roof Membrane (UL System TGFU.R6692) .
2.5.1.1.2 Breaking Strength, minimum, ASTM D751 : Machine direction, 500 lbf (87 kN/m); Cross machine direction, 400 lbf (70 kN/m).
2.5.1.1.3 Tear Strength, minimum, ASTM D751: Machine direction,125 lbf (21 kN/m); Cross machine direction, 145 lbf (25 kN/m).
2.5.1.1.4 Elongation at Break, ASTM D751: 20 percent.
2.5.1.1.5 Dynamic Impact/Puncture Resistance, ASTM D5635: Pass.
2.5.1.1.6 Minimum Membrane Thickness, nominal, less backing, ASTM D751: 60 mils (1.5 mm).
2.5.1.1.7 Thickness over fiber, optical method: 0.014 inches.
2.5.1.1.8 Accelerated Weathering , ASTM G155 and ASTM G154: Not greater than 5,000 hr., no cracking or crazing.
2.5.1.1.9 Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D3389: Not greater than 2,000 cycles, H-18 wheel, 1,000 g load.
2.5.1.1.10Color: White.
2.5.1.1.11Solar Reflectance Index (SRI), ASTM E1980: 110 (White, initial), 86 (White, 3-yr aged).
2.5.2 Sheet Flashing : Manufacturer's standard, smooth -backed, sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness and color as KEE roof membrane.
2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
2.6.1 General: Au xiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.
2.6.1.1 Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.6.2 Membrane Bonding Adhesive:
2.6.2.1 Bonding adhesive, solvent based fast drying, VOC -compliant, for bonding KEE fleece back single ply membranes and flashings to substrates.
2.6.2.1.1 Basis of design product: Tremco, TremPly KEE FBII Bonding Adhesive.
2.6.3 Flashing Membrane Adhesive:
2.6.3.1 Bonding adhesive, solvent based fast drying, VOC -compliant, for bonding KEE smooth -backed single ply membranes and flashings to substrates.
2.6.3.1.1 Basis of design product: Tremco, TremPly KEE LV Bonding Adhesive.
2.6.3.1.2 VOC, maximum, ASTM D 3960: 200 g/L.
2.6.4 Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless -steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 mm by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.
2.6.5 Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and met al or plastic plates complying with corrosion -resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening components to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 07 54 16-5
2.6.6 Joint Sealant : Elastomeric joint sealant compatible with roofing materials, with movement capability appropriate for application.
2.6.6.1 Joint Sealant, Polyurethane: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50 single-component moisture curing sealant, formulated for compatibility and use in dynamic and static joints; paintable.
2.6.6.1.1 Basis of design product: Tremco, TremSEAL Pro.
2.6.6.1.2 Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D3960: 40 g/L.
2.6.6.1.3 Hardness, Shore A, ASTM C661: 40.
2.6.6.1.4 Adhesion to Concrete, ASTM C794: 35 pli.
2.6.6.1.5 Tensile Strength, ASTM D412: 350 psi (2410 kPa).
2.6.6.1.6 Color: White.
2.6.7 Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
2.6.8 Miscellaneous Accessories : Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preform ed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.7 ROOF INSULATION MATERIALS
2.7.1 General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roofing manufacturer, selecte d from insulation manufacturer's standard sizes, suitable for application, and of thicknesses indicated.
2.7.1.1 Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated, not less than two times the roof slope.
2.7.2 Roof Insulation: Provide roof insulation product in thicknesses indicated in Part 3 as follows:
2.7.2.1 Board Insulation, Polyisocyanurate: CFC - and HCFC - free, with recycled content glass -fiber ma t facer on both major surfaces, ASTM C1289 Type II Class 1.
2.7.2.1.1 Compressive Strength, ASTM D1621: Grade 2: 20 psi (138 kPa).
2.7.2.1.2 Conditioned Thermal Resistance at 75 deg. F (24 deg. C): 14.4 at 2.5 inches (50.8 mm) thick.
2.8 ROOF INSULATION ACCESSORIES
2.8.1 Cover Board:
2.8.1.1 Gypsum panel, glass-mat-faced, primed, ASTM C1177/C1177M.
2.8.1.1.1 Basis of design product: GP Gypsum DensDeck Prime.
2.8.1.1.2 Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2.8.2 Roof Insulation Adhesive:
2.8.2.1 Urethane adhesive, be ad-applied, low -rise two -component solvent -free low odor, formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate.
2.8.2.1.1 Basis of design product: Tremco, Low Rise Foam Insulation Adhesive.
2.8.2.1.2 Flame Spread Index, ASTM E84: 10.
2.8.2.1.3 Smoke Developed Index, ASTM E84: 30.
2.8.2.1.4 Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D3960: 0 g/L.
2.8.2.1.5 Tensile Strength, minimum, ASTM D412: 250 psi (1720 kPa).
2.8.2.1.6 Peel Adhesion, minimum, ASTM D903: 17 lbf/in (2.50 kN/m).
2.8.2.1.7 Flexibility, 70 deg. F (39 deg. C), ASTM D816: Pass.
2.8.3 Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board.
2.9 WALKWAY MATERIALS
2.9.1 Walkway / Protection Mat Material:
2.9.1.1 Walkway roll, reinforced KEE membrane roll with serr ated slip -resistant surface, fabricated for heat welding to compatible KEE membrane surface.
2.9.1.1.1 Basis of design product: Tremco, TremPly KEE Walkway Roll. 07 54 16-6
2.9.1.1.2 Roll Size: 30 inches by 50 ft (760 mm by 15.2 m).
2.9.1.1.3 Thickness: 0.047 inch (0.6 mm).
2.9.1.1.4 Breaking strength: 56 lbs (9.8 kN/m).
2.9.1.1.5 Color: Light yellow.
2.9.1.2 Protection mat, reinforced KEE membrane mat with serrated slip -resistant surface and enhanced puncture resistance, fabricated for heat welding to compatible KEE membrane surface.
2.9.1.2.1 Basis of design product: Tremco, TremPly KEE Protection Mat.
2.9.1.2.2 Mat Size: 28 inches by 48 feet (710 mm by 13.1 m).
2.9.1.2.3 Thickness: 0.234 inch (5.9 mm).
2.9.1.2.4 Puncture resistance: 850 lbs (148 kN/m).
2.9.1.2.5 Tear strength: 350 lbs (60 kN/m).
2.9.1.2.6 Color: Yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
3.1.1 Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
3.1.2 Verify that existing substrate is sound and dry.
3.1.2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing syst em manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
3.2.2 Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
3.3.3 Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
3.3.1 Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approved details.
3.3.2 NRCA Installation Details: Install roofing system in accordance with applicable NRCA Manual Plates and NRCA recommendations; modify as required to comply with manufacturer's approved details and perimeter fastening requirements of FM Global references if applicable.
3.4 BASE SHEET
3.4.1 Properly Relax 33# Base sheet before installation per manufacturer requirements, nail with approved base sheet Cap nails with 1" integral cap, lap base sheet 4" on side laps and 6" on end laps, nail 9" on laps and 18" on center staggered 12".
3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION
3.5.1 Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
3.5.2 Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
3.5.3 Tapered Crickets: Install tapered in sulation in waterways and behind curbs to provide crickets to ensure positive slope to drain.
3.5.3.1 Where crickets are indicated or required to provide positive slope to drain, make slope of crickets minimum of two times the roof slope, not less than 1/4 inch in 12 inches (1:48).
3.5.4 Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness.
3.5.4.1 Flat Insulation System on Sloped Roof Deck: Install insulation at minimum thickness as follows:
07 54 16-7
3.5.4.1.1 Minimum total thickness of Continuous Insulation: 1.5 inches.
3.5.4.2 Insulation Drain Sumps : Tapered insulation sumps, not less than 2 by 2 ft. (600 by 600 mm), sloped to roof drain; sump to maximum depth of not more than 1 inch (25 mm) less than the Project -stipulated continuous insulatio n thickness based upon code requirements.
3.5.5 Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.
3.5.6 Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight li ne with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation.
3.5.6.1 Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
3.5.7 Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:
3.5.7.1 Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead -applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
3.5.8 Cover Boards : Install cover boards ove r insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together.
3.5.8.1 Secure cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
3.5.8.2 Adhere cover boards by setting in ribbons of bead -applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining cover board in place.
3.6 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
3.6.1 Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6.2 Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.
3.6.3 Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
3.6.4 Bonding Adhesive : Apply fleece back bonding adhesive per manufacturer warranty detail requirements. Broom or roll membrane into place.
3.6.5 In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
3.6.6 Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
3.6.7 Welded Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot -air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.
3.6.7.1 Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.
3.6.7.2 Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.
3.6.7.3 Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
3.6.8 Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.
3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
3.7.1 Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7.2 Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not appl y to seam area of flashing.
3.7.3 Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.
3.7.4 Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot -air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
3.7.5 Seal top termination of base flashing with a metal termination bar and a continuous bead of joint sealant.
3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
3.8.1 Flexible Walkways: Install walkway from roof access ladder leading to and around all roof top service units and to provide a safe path of travel to all roof drains for maintenance cleaning. Heat weld to substrate.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.9.1 Roofing Inspector: Manufacturer to provide daily site visits by manufacturer field inspector and provide dai ly field reports including progress photos.
07 54 16-8
3.9.2 Final Roof Inspection : Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.
3.9.3 Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
3.9.4 Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
3/10.1 Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Com pletion and according to warranty requirements.
3.10.2 Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07 54 16
07 62 00 -1
SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 Section includes:
1.1.1.1 Low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
1.1.1.2 Miscellaneous sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.1.2 Related Requirements:
1.1.2.1 Division 07 lo w slope membrane roofing section for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing and for related warranty requirements.
1.1.2.2 Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties" for manufactured copings and counterflashings incorporated in roof sys tem.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 Product Data: For each type of product.
1.2.1.1 Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
1.2.2 Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.2.2.1 Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
1.2.2.2 Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
1.2.2.3 Indicate details meet requirements of SMACNA and NRCA required by this Section.
1.2.2.4 Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10).
1.2.3 Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Contractor's Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is ANSI/SPRI ES-1 tested.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Warranties: Manufacturer's executed warranty documents. Submit prior to acceptance of Work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
1.5.1.1 For copings and roof edge flashings that are ANSI/SPRI ES -1 tested; fabrication shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.6.1 Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other m aterials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
1.6.2 Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunli ght and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
1.7.1 Refer to warranty requirements of Division 075416 for terms and conditions of warranties covering work of this Section.
Sheet metal flashings and trime shall be included in manufacturers entire roof system warranty coverage.
1.7.2 Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.7.2.1 Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1.7.2.1.1 Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244.
1.7.2.1.2 Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214.
1.7.2.1.3 Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
1.7.2.2 Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other def ects in 07 62 00 -2
construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
2.1.2 Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
2.1.3 Flashings and Fastening: Comply with requirements of Division 07 roofing sections. Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component materials and installation techniques that comply with requirements and recommendations of the following:
2.1.3.1 FM Global 1-49: "Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Perimeter Flashings."
2.1.3.2 FM Global 1-29: "Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Above Deck Roof Components."
2.1.3.3 NRCA: "The NRCA Roofing Manual" for construction details and recommendations.
2.1.4 Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effec ts.
2.2 SHEET METALS
2.2.1 General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, t emporary protective film before shipping.
2.2.2 Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation or aluminum -zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A792/A792M, C lass AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); with smooth, flat surface; prefinished by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M.
2.2.2.1 Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., TremLock Sheet.
2.2.2.2 Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
2.2.2.2.1 Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2.2.2.2.1.1 Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.2.2.3 Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light -colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
2.2.3 PVC/KEE-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; prefinished with non -reinforced PVC/KEE membrane; for formed roo f edge flashings to receive heat -weldable, compatible with single-ply membrane roofing specified in Division 07 Section "Ketone Ethylene Ester (KEE) Roofing."
2.2.3.1 Basis-of-Design Product: Tremco, Tremply KEE/TPA Coated Metal.
2.2.3.2 Sheet Metal Thickness: Zinc-coated steel, nominal 0.028-inch/24 ga. (0.71-mm) thickness.
2.2.3.3 Finish: Laminated with 0.020 inch/20 mil (0.50 mm) thick, unreinforced PVC/KEE membrane on exposed side and finished with clear acrylic coating on non-exposed side.
2.2.3.3.1 Color: Match color of roof membrane specified in Division 07 Section "Ketone Ethylene Ester (KEE) Roofing."
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
2.3.1 Self-Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a slip -resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl - or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release -paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendat ions of underlayment manufacturer.
2.3.1.1 Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) or lower.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.4.1 General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings , sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
2.4.2 Fasteners: Wood screws, annular t hreaded nails, self -tapping screws, self -locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
2.4.2.1 General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
2.4.2.1.1 Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory -applied coating.
Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather s ide of metal.
2.4.2.1.2 Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.
2.4.2.2 Fasteners for Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) and Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329.
2.4.3 Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polyurethane at concealed joints and silicone at exposed joints; of type, 07 62 00 -3
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
2.5.1 General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, me tal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
2.5.1.1 Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
2.5.1.2 Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
2.5.1.3 Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks ; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2.5.1.4 Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.
2.5.2 Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
2.5.3 Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
2.5.3.1 Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
2.5.3.2 Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
2.5.4 Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion -type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
2.5.5 Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
2.5.6 Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.5.7 Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
2.6.1 Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch- (2.4-m-) long, but not exceeding 12 -feet- (3.6-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
2.6.1.1 Coping Profile: As indicated, or if not indicated, as selected from SMACNA Manual profiles.
2.6.1.2 Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, concealed splice plate.
2.6.1.3 Fabricate from the Following Materials:
2.6.1.3.1 Galvanized Steel or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch/24 ga. (0.71 mm) thick.
2.6.2 Cleats for Copings:
2.6.2.1 Galvanized Steel or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.034 inch/22 ga. (0.85 mm) thick.
2.6.3 Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:
2.6.3.1 Galvanized Steel or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: (0.71 mm) 0.028 inch/24 ga. thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3 -1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
3.2.1 Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations of cited sheet metal standard that apply to installation characteristics required unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3.2.1.1 Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
3.2.1.2 Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
3.2.2 Metal Protection : Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where me tal contacts pressure -treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other 07 62 00 -4
permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
3.2.2.1 Coat concealed side of uncoated -aluminum and stainless steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
3.2.2.2 Underlayment: Where install ing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
3.2.3 Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection.
3.2.3.1 Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
3.2.3.2 Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
3.2.4 Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.
3.2.5 Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage.
Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
3.2.6 Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
3.2.6.1 Use sealant-filled joints unless ot herwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members f or 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard.
3.3.1.1 Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes.
3.3.1.2 Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3.3.2 Copings:
3.3.2.1 Install copings in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1.
3.3.3 Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
3.3.3.1 Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
3.3.3.2 Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing.
3.3.3.3 Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm).
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
3.4.1 Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.5.1 Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
3.5.2 Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
3.5.3 Clean off excess sealants.
3.5.4 Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal fla shing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flas hing and trim in clean condition during construction.
3.5.5 Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 62 00
07 92 00-1
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Related Documents:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 Description of Work:
1.2.1 The work includes the furnishing and installing of all sealant work, except glazing sealants, required to weatherproof the structure, including interior sealant work, as shown and noted on the drawings and as specified. Sealants for glazin g work are specified in Section 08 81 00. Sealants for tile work are specified in Section 09 30 00. Sealant for preformed roof and wall panels are specified in Section 07 41 00.
1.2.2 This section contains requirements pertaining to all weather sealing an d caulking throughout the project and becomes a part of each and every section calling for caulking and sealing, unless otherwise specified, as though written in full in each sec tion.
1.3 System Performances:
Provide joints sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals.
1.4 Quality Assurance:
1.4.1 Installer Qualifications : Engage an Installer who has, within the last 3 years, successfully completed at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this project and who will assign mechanics from these earlier applications to this pr oject, of which one will serve as lead mechanic.
1.4.2 Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials : Obtain joint seal er materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required.
1.5 Submittals:
1.5.1 Submittal procedures and quantities as specified in Section 01 33 00.
1.5.2 Product Data : Submit manufacturer's technical data for each joint sealer pr oduct required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application.
1.5.3 Samples for Initial Selection Purposes : Submit manufacturer's bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, including special colors provided by manufacturer for each product exposed to view.
1.5.4 Samples for Verification Purposes : Submit samples of each type and color of joint sealer required. Install joint sealer samples in 1/2" wide joints formed between two 6" long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealers in the work. The workmanship, bond and color of sealant work throughout the project shall match that of the app roved sample.
1.5.5 Certificates: Submit cert ificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling:
1.6.1 Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multicomponent mate rials.
1.6.2 Store and handle materials to prevent their d eterioration or damage due to moisture, contaminants or other causes. Store sealants in an area where they will not be subject to temperatures above 100 degrees fahrenheit. Do not store materials that have exceeded the manufacturer's recommended shelf life.
1.7 Project Conditions:
1.7.1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers, or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, fog, frost, condensation or other causes.
1.7.2 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
1.8 Warranty:
In addition to the warranty and correction of work req uirements of the General Conditions, work under this section shall be warranteed against moisture penetration for a period of 20 years from the date of "Substantial Completion". The written warranty shall include materials and labor required to repair leak s that develop. The warranty shall be signed by the sealant manufacturer, the sealant installer and the Contractor and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
1.8.1 20 year limited warranty for Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant.
1.8.2 20 Year non-staining Warranty for Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant 07 92 00-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials:
Products shall conform to the reference documents listed for each use. Color of sealant and caulking shall match adjacent su rface color, unless sp ecified otherwise. In concealed installation, use standard gray or black sealant. For ASTM C 920 sealants, use a sealant that has been tested on the type(s) of substrate to which it will be applied.
2.1.1 Silicone Rubber One Component – (SLNT-1) Dow Corning 790 or 795 silicone construction sealant.
2.1.2 Primer for Sealant: Use a non-staining, quick-drying type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the particular application that has been tested for durability on the surfaces to be sealed.
2.1.3 Bond Breakers: Use the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the particular application.
2.1.4 Joint Backings: Use polyurethane or polyethylene foams free from oil or other staining elements as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Backing material shall be compatible with the sealant. Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as joint backings.
2.1.4.1 Masking Tape : For masking around joint, provide an appropriate masking tape which will effectively prevent application of sealant on surfaces not scheduled to receive it and which is removable without damage to substrate.
2.1.4.2 Color of sealants to match adjacent surfaces which may require a special color normally produced by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be clean, dry to the touch, and free from moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion. Where adequate grooves have not b een provided, clean out grooves to a depth of 1/2 inch and grind to a minimum width of 1/4 inch without damage to the adjoining work. No grinding shall be required on metal surfaces.
3.1.1 Concrete Surfaces:
3.1.1.1 Install only on surfaces which are dry, sound, well-brushed and wiped free from dust.
3.1.1.2 At all open joints, remove dust by mechanically blown compressed air if so required.
3.1.1.3 To remove oil and grease, use sandblasting or wire brushing.
3.1.1.4 Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by sandblasting or wire brushing.
3.1.1.5 Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities.
3.1.2 Steel Surfaces:
3.1.2.1 Unprimed or Unfinished Steel Surfaces in Contact with Sealant: Sandblast as required to achieve accepta ble surface bond. If sandblasting is not practical, or would damage adjacent finish, scrape the metal or wire brush to remove mi ll scale and rust. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean white rags only.
3.1.2.2 Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by using a solvent which leaves no residue.
3.2 Sealant Preparation:
Do not modify the sealant by addition of liquids, solvents, or powders. Mix multicomponent elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.3 Application:
3.3.1 Backstops: Where joint cavities are constructed deeper than indicated, tightly pack the back or bottom with backstop material to provide a joint of the depth indicated. Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes.
3.3.2 Primer: Just prior to application of the sealant or caulking compound, clean out all loose particles from joints. Apply primer in accordance with compound manufacturer's directions. Do not apply primer to exposed finish surface.
3.3.3 Bond Breaker : Provide bond breakers, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer, for each type of joint and sealant used.
3.3.4 Sealant and Caulking Compounds : Use a compound that is compatible with the material to and against which it is applied.
Do not use a compound that has exceeded its shelf life or has become too jelled to be discharged in a continuous flow from th e gun.
Apply the compound in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Force the compound into joints with suffi cient pressure to fill the joints solidly. Compound shall be uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles. 07 92 00-3
3.3.4.1 Installation of SLNT-1: Use SLNT-1 where indicated on drawings, and for other sealant work subject to movement not otherwise indicated on drawing s or specified herein. Use for non -sleeved mechanical and electrical penetrations in interior or exterior walls above grade and other exterior applications , including vertical surfaces.
Joints to receive SLNT-1 shall be not less than 1/4 inch and not exc eed two inches in width. Depth of sealant shall be as follows:
Joint Width Min. Depth Max. Depth
1/4" to 1/2" 1/4" Equal to width
1/2" to 1" 1/2" 5/8"
3.3.5 Sealed joints shall be neatly pointed on flush surfaces with beading tool, an d internal corners with eaving tool. Excess material shall be cleanly removed. Sealant, where exposed, shall be free of wrinkles and uniformly smooth. Sealing shall be complete before final coats of paint are applied.
3.3.6 Miscellaneous Caulking and S ealing Work: The entire extent of sealing work is not necessarily fully or individually described herein. Sealing shall be provided wherever required to prevent light leakage as well as moisture leakage. Refer to drawings and other sections of these specifications for conditions and related parts of the work.
3.4 Protection and Cleaning:
3.4.1 Protection: Protect areas adjacent to joints from compound smears. Masking tape may be used for this purpose if removed five to ten minutes after the joint is filled.
3.4.2 Cleaning: Immediately scrape off fresh compound that has been smeared on masonry and rub clean with a solvent as recommended by the compound manufacturer. Upon completion of compound application, remove all remaining smears and stains resulting therefrom and leave the work in a clean and neat condition.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
08 62 00-1
SECTION 08 62 00 - PREFABRICATED SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PROVIDE PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
1.2.1 Submit product data, shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS: BRISTOLITE SKYLIGHTS, SANTA ANA, CA OR APPROVED EQUAL
2.2 CURB MOUNTED SKYLIGHTS:
a. Type: ALB Bristol Acrylic
b. Glazing Material: Acrylic plastic glazing.
c. Dome Type: Bubble.
d. Curb: Extruded aluminum frame.
e. Frame Finish: clear (silver color) aluminum.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1 COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS OF DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.2 PROVIDE ARCHITECT WITH CURRENT ICBO # FOR INSTALLED PRODUCT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION END OF SECTION 08 62 00
09 91 00-1
SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.2.1 Extent of painting work is indicated on schedules, and as herein specified.
1.2.2 Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout project, except as otherwise indicated.
1.2.2.1 Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.
1.2.3 Work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical, electrical work, sealants and caulking, except as otherwise indicated.
1.2.3.1 Upon final completion Contractor shall provide the Owner with properly labeled new sealable containers of mixed paint which were utilized on the project in the following quantities.
Two (2) - five (5) gallon containers of each color mix which was applied to a surface area totaling greater than 15,000 s.f.
One (1) - one (1) gallon container of each color mix which was applied to a surface area totaling less than 15,000 s.f.
1.2.4 "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
1.2.5 Surfaces to be painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be paintedor where natural finish of material matches adjacent material color, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules". Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or areas.
Note: Contractor shall paint all sprinkler piping, supply and return mechanical grille registers and/or ductwork, louvers, etc. to match adjacent wall surfaces even if grilles are pre-finished. Exact color of paint to be selected by Architect in field at time of field samples. If color or finish is not designated, Architect will select these from standard colors or finishes available.
1.2.6 Following categories of work are not included as part of field-applied finish work.
1.2.6.1 Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or installer- finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) pre-finished partition systems, acoustic materials, ceramic tile, pre-formed roof and wall panels, elevator entrance doors and frames, elevator equipment, and mechanical and electrical equipment, including switchgear and distribution cabinets.
1.2.6.2 Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
1.2.6.3 Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting.(Galvanized metal is not a finished metal surface).
1.2.6.4 Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting.
1.2.7 Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.3.1 Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
1.3.2 Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
1.4.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use.
09 91 00-2
1.4.2 Samples: Prior to beginning work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. Userepresentative colors when preparing samples for review.
Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material and application for each coatof each finish sample.
1.4.2.1 On 12" x 12" hardboard provide three samples of each color and material, with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by architect until acceptable sheen, color, and texture is achieved.
1.4.2.2 On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of natural, painted, and stained wood finish. Label and identify each as to location and application. Allow for maximum 3 different brushouts of each color.
1.4.2.3 On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building components, duplicate painted finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface, as directed, until required sheen, color, cover and texture is obtained. Allow for maximum 3 different brushouts of each color.Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work.
1.4.2.3.1 Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job.
1.4.3 Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams “Custodian Project Color and Product Information” report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, productdata pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
1.5.1 Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information:
Name or title of material.
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacturer.
Manufacturer's name.
Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
1.5.2 Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.5.2.1 Protect from freezing and excessive heat where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints.
1.5.3 Job Conditions:
1.5.3.1 Apply water-base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F. (10 degrees C.) and 90 degrees F. (32 degrees C.), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
1.5.3.2 Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F. (7 degrees C.) and 95 degrees F. (35 degrees C.), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
1.5.3.3 Do not apply paint in high winds, rain, fog, or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
1.5.3.3.1 Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods.
1.6 WARRANTY:
1.6.1 Guarantee painting and finishing against peeling, fading, cracking, blistering, or crazing for a period of 2 years from the date of "Notice of Completion". The written warranty shall include materials and labor. The warranty shall be signed by the paint manufacturer, the painter and the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
2.1.1 Basis of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of Sherwin-Williams; local contact: John Dumesnil, 619-665-9341 or [email protected]. 09 91 00-3
2.1.2 Requests for Substitutions: will only be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS:
2.2.1 Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable.
2.2.2 VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), or authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2.3 Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products of named manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.
2.2.3.1 Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
3.1.1 Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions havebeen corrected in a manner acceptable to Applicator to produce the results called for herein.
3.1.2 Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area.
3.1.3 Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, welding slag and burrs, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation and adhesive bond of a durable paint film.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION:
3.2.1 General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition.
3.2.1.1 Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.
3.2.1.2 Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items.
3.2.1.3 Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Fill cracks, holes and imperfections.
Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Remove mill scale and welding slag, grind welding joints and burrs smooth. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces.
3.2.1.4 Remove mildew from exterior impervious surfaces by scrubbing with a solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Power wash with a minimum of 3500psi clean water and allow substrate to dry.
3.2.2 Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement plaster and cement-asbestos board to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils and by roughening as required to remove glaze.
3.2.2.1 Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
3.2.2.2 Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid, and allow to dry before painting.
3.2.3 Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat.After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried.
3.2.3.1 Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, paneling.
3.2.3.2 When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for backpriming.
3.2.3.3 Seal tops, bottoms and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer 09 91 00-4
immediately upon delivery to job or immediately after machining by Contractor on site.
3.2.4 Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
3.2.4.1 Repaint shop-applied prime coats as required by other sections of these specifications. Clean and paint with same type or compatible primer.
3.2.5 Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent, per SSPC-SP1. Apply a test coat of primer and allow the coating to dry for one week. In the presence of the Architect, perform an adhesion testper ASTM D-3359 before proceeding with painting. If coating does not adhere per test method, hand tool clean all galvanized or non-ferrous metal per SSPC-SP2. Apply a test coat of primer and test for adhesion per ASTM D-3359 in the presence of the Architect.
3.3 MATERIALS PREPARATION:
3.3.1 Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.3.2 Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
3.3.3 Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.
3.4 APPLICATION:
3.4.1 General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
3.4.1.1 Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in Section 09 06 00: Interior + Exterior Color and Material Schedule. For the purposes of bidding, the Contractor shall assume that a minimum of 4 trips will be required for brush-outs as required per 1.4.2.2 and 1.4.2.3
3.4.1.2 Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Where a deep color finish color is chosen, primer must be tinted to the appropriate monochromatic gray tone for a two coat coverage. Provide the monochromatic primer only on the walls to receive the deep chromatic color.
3.4.1.3 Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
3.4.1.4 Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment.
3.4.1.5 Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.
3.4.1.6 Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
3.4.1.7 Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4.1.8 Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
3.4.1.9 Repaint first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4.2 Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
3.4.2.1 As recommended by coating manufacturer, allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
3.4.3 Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.
3.4.4 Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
3.4.5 Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: Grilles, registers, louvers, trim (to match adjacent surface), Sprinkler Piping, Piping, pipe hangers and supports, Heat exchangers, Tanks, Ductwork, insulation, Motor, mechanical equipment and supports, Accessory items.
3.4.6 Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: Light fixtures - see fixture schedule for types (including trim rings, pendants, and plates/boxes), Conduit and fittings, Switchgear. 09 91 00-5
3.4.7 Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. See 1.2.7.1 for additional information.
3.4.7.1 Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in firstcoat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
3.4.7.2 Spot prime all patched and repaired concrete and stucco surfaces.
3.4.8 Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Two coats are specified. However, apply as many coats as necessary to completely cover to produce an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
3.4.9 Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Providesatin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4.10 Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements at a time suitable to the project schedule and at Contractor's expense and at no cost to the Owner. The requirements of this specification are to produce work of excellent quality in complete conformance with the bestpractice of the trade and these specifications.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
3.5.1 The right is reserved by Owner to invoke the following material testing procedure at any time, and any number of times during period of field painting:
3.5.1.1 Engage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint being used. Samples of materials delivered to project site will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
3.5.1.2 Testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for any or all of following characteristics: Abrasion resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, washability, absorption, accelerated weathering, dry opacity, accelerated yellowness, recoating, skinning, color retention, alkali resistance and quantitative materials analysis.
3.5.2 If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting work, and remove non-complying paint; pay for testing; repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint; remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are non-compatible.
3.6 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION:
3.6.1 Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day.
3.6.2 Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work.
Immediately remove paint that falls on finished surfaces not scheduled to be painted, using materials and techniques that will not damage the affected surface. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as acceptable to Architect.
3.6.2.1 Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.
3.6.2.2 At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE:
3.7.1 General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
3.7.1.1 Galvanized/Aluminum Metal: Provide pretreatment of surface as required per Section 3.2.
3.7.1.1.1 High Performance Gloss Finish: This section covers metals which are subjected to frequent use/abuse, including all: Trellises, Exposed Structural Metal, Doors and Frames, Bollards, Handrails, Guardrails, Metal Screens or Grids, Fencing, Gates, Trash enclosure gates and hardware, etc.
Epoxy Prime Coat:
Sherwin-Williams: Macropoxy 646-100, B58 Series (5-10 mils DFT) Second and Third Coat:
Sherwin-Williams: Sher-Loxane Polysiloxane Gloss, B80 Series (4-6 mils DFT)
3.7.1.1.2 Acrylic Gloss Finish: This section covers metals which are not subjected to frequent use/abuse, including all: Flashings, Covers, Reglet reveals, Gutters/Downspouts (when not pre-finished) and miscellaneous metal.
Pre-Treatment:
Sherwin-Williams: GLL Clean n Etch
09 91 00-6
Prime Coat:
Sherwin-Williams: ProIndustrial ProCryl Acrylic Metal Primer B66-310 Second and Third Coat:
Sherwin-Williams: ProIndustrial WB Alkyd Urethane Gloss B53-1050
3.7.1.2 Ferrous Metal: Provide pretreatment of surface as required per Section 3.2. For shop primed material, provide certificate of primer specification and what compatibility for the following coats
3.7.1.2.1 High Performance Gloss Finish: This section covers metals which are subjected to frequent use/abuse, including all: Trellises, Exposed Structural Metal, Doors and Frames, Bollards, Handrails, Guardrails, Metal Screens or Grids, Fencing, Gates, Trash enclosure gates and hardware, etc.
Epoxy Prime Coat:
Sherwin-Williams: Macropoxy 646-100, B58 Series (5-10 mils DFT) Second and Third Coat:
Sherwin-Williams: Sher-Loxane Polysiloxane Gloss, B80 Series (4-6 mils DFT)
3.7.1.2.2 Acrylic Gloss Finish: This section covers metals which are not subjected to frequent use/abuse, including all: Flashings, Covers, Reglet reveals, Gutters/Downspouts (when not pre-finished) and miscellaneous metal.
Pre-Treatment:
Sherwin-Williams: GLL Clean n Etch
Prime Coat:
Sherwin-Williams: ProIndustrial ProCryl Acrylic Metal Primer B66-310 Second and Third Coat:
Sherwin-Williams: ProIndustrial WB Alkyd Urethane Gloss B53-1050
3.7.1.3 Cement Plaster:
3.7.1.6.1 Acrylic Flat Finish
Primer:
Sherwin-Williams: Loxon Primer LX2W50
Second and Third Coat:
Sherwin-Williams: Superpaint Latex Flat A80 Series
3.7.1.4 Fiber Cement, Exterior Gypsum Soffit:
3.7.1.4.1 Acrylic Flat Finish
Prime Coat: Alkali Resistant Primer
Sherwin-Williams: Loxon Primer LX2W50
Second and Third Coat::
Sherwin-Williams: Superpaint Latex Flat A80 Series
END OF SECTION 09 91 00
Reviewed: Sherwin Williams August 2020 John Dumesnil
11 24 29 -1
SECTION 11 24 29 - FACILITY FALL PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1 Fall protection systems, including:
1.1.1.1 Roof hatch rail systems, non-penetrating.
1.1.1.2 Skylight screen systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1 General: Applicable edition of references cited in this Section is current edition published on date of issue of Project specifications, unless otherwise required by building code in force.
1.2.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI), www.ansi.org.
1.2.2.1 A 21.1 - Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings and Toe Boards.
1.2.2.2 A 58.1 - Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures.
1.2.2.3 A 117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
1.2.3 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):
1.2.3.1 29 CFR 1910.29 - Fall protection systems and falling object protection-criteria and practices.
1.2.4 California Occupational Safety & Health Administration (CAL OSHA):
1.2.4.1 1620 - Design of Temporary Railing.
1.2.4.2 1621 - Railings and Toe Boards.
1.2.4.3 1633 - Elevator Shafts to be Guarded.
1.2.4.4 3209 - Standard Guardrails.
1.2.4.5 3210 - Guardrails at Elevated Locations.
1.2.4.6 3211 - Wall Openings.
1.2.4.7 3212 - Floor Openings, Floor Holes and Roofs.
1.2.4.8 3213 - Service Pits and Yard Surface Openings.
1.2.4.9 3214 - Stair Rails and Handrails.
1.3 COORDINATION
1.3.1 Coordinate selection of fall protection and fall restraint devices and attachment provisions with Owner's safety program and Owner-provided personal protection equipment. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.3.2 Coordinate layout and location of facility fall protection with Owner and Architect.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Product Data: For each type of fall protection and accessory, including brackets and fasteners.
1.4.1.1 Submit manufacturer’s published literature including structural design data, structural properties data, grating load/deflection tables, corrosion resistance tables, certificates of compliance, test reports as applicable, concrete anchor systems and their allowable load tables, and design calculations for systems not sized or designed in the contract documents.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings: Show locations and layout of fall protection components; include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details of installation.
1.4.3 Samples for Verification: Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long, of each component in finish indicated.
1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
1.5.1 Qualification Data: For Installer and Testing Agency.
1.5.2 Product Test Reports: Based on e valuation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
1.5.3 Contractor's Certificate: Submit document indicating that Contractor has received and reviewed Owner's Safety Plan requirements related to fall protection installation.
1.5.4 Field quality-control test reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Operation and maintenance data.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7.1 Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or asse mbling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
11 24 29 -2
1.8.1 Deliver manufactured materials in ori ginal, unbroken pallets, packages, containers, or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturer. Adhesives, resins and their catalysts and hardeners shall be crated or boxed separately and noted as such to f acilitate their movement to a dry indoor storage facility.
1.8.2 Store and handle materials carefully to prevent abrasion, cracking, chipping, twisting, other deformations, and other types o f damage.
1.8.2.1 Store adhesives, resins and their catalysts in dry indoor storage facilities, between 70 - and 85-degrees F (21 to 29 degrees C) until they are required for use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Occupational Safety and Health Standards: Provide fall protection components complying with requirements of 29 CFR 1910.23 and 29 CFR 1910.29, including structural performance.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
2.2.1 Basis-of-Design Manufacturer/Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide listed products of Fibergrate Composite Structures, Dallas TX, (800) 527-4043. Provide specified products.
2.2.2 Single Source: Provide fall protection components from a single manufacturer through a single source, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 ROOF HATCH GUARD
2.3.1 Roof Hatch Guard: Fall protection safety railing components including pipe, fittings, and accessories corresponding to design indicated on Drawings and complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.3.1.1 Application: Roof hatch guardrail system for low slope roofs up to 5 deg. slope, including:
2.3.1.1.1 Roof hatch guard rail with gate.
2.3.1.2 Basis of Design Product: Fibergrate, Dynaround Hatch Guard.
2.3.1.3 System Description: Non-penetrating roof guardrail system having a minimum finished height of 42 inches (1067 mm) with a mid -rail installed at 21 inches (533 mm) abov e the walking surface; including posts, rails, fittings, and counterweights; and having the following characteristics:
2.3.1.3.1 Fiberglass Reinforcement: Continuous roving, continuous strand mat, and surfacing veil.
2.3.1.3.2 Resin: Fire retardant vinyl ester.
2.3.1.3.3 Flexural Strength (Full Section): 70,000 psi (482 MPa).
2.3.1.3.4 Flame Spread: ASTM E 84; 25 or less.
2.3.1.3.5 Color: Yellow, with UV resistant coating.
2.3.1.4 Mounting: Compression-mounted to hatch curb.
2.3.1.5 Access: Manufacturer’s standard self-closing gate.
2.3.2 Miscellaneous Fittings: Galvanized cast iron with and feature 9/16 -inch (14 mm) diameter socket head set screws for clamping to the FRP round tube pipes, posts, rails and outriggers.
2.5 FITTINGS AND FASTENERS
2.5.1 General: Provide Type 304 or Type 305 stainless-steel fasteners.
2.5.2 Fittings: Malleable cast iron, ASTM A 47, galvanized according to ASTM A 153.
2.6 FABRICATION
2.6.1 Cut and drill FRP and metal shapes cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remo ve sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
2.6.2 Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
2.6.3 Form changes in direction by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
2.6.4 Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.1.2 Verify that roof assembly is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, securely anchored and ready for placement of fal l protection.
11 24 29 -3
3.1.3 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Install fall protection to comply with requirements of 29 CFR 1910.29 and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.2.2 Set fall protection components accurately in location, alignment, and ele vation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
3.2.2.1 Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
3.2.2.2 Set components plumb within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 3 feet (4 mm in 1 m).
3.2.2.3 Align horizontal members so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m).
3.2.3 Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.3.1 Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect and comply with specified requirements.
3.3.2 Perform additional testi ng and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
3.4.1 Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4.2 Replace componen ts that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 11 24 29
PLUMBING
220400-1
SECTION 220400 PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. The "Mechanical General Provisions," Section 23 00 00 is a part of this section and applies as fully as if repeated herein.
B. The work under this section includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and completing the plumbing work, except as hereinafter specifically excluded. All work shall include up to5 feet outside of the building unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
C. Work included shall be as indicated on the drawings, including but not limited to the following:
1. Domestic Water System.
2. Condensate Drain System and make-up water for HVAC Equipment.
D. Work not included:
1. Cutting and blocking of structure for fixtures and piping.
2. Forming and pouring of concrete for housekeeping pads.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Reference to Other Sections: The applicable requirements from the following specification sections shall form a part of the plumbing work and the Contractor shall consult them in detail for general and specific requirements:
Section 23 00 00 Mechanical General Provisions.
23 30 00 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION:
A. Condensate piping, condensate overflow piping, and sewer piping above grade receiving cold condensate within building shall be insulated wit h JM Rubatex by RBX Industries, Owens Corning, Armacell, or equal.
2.2 FITTINGS AND PIPING:
A. Domestic Water Piping:
1. Above Grade: Lead free Type L copper tubing harddrawn. Pipe manufacturers shall be Mueller Industries, Cambridge-Lee Industries, Cerro Flow Products, orequal. a. Lead free wrought copper solder sweat fittings and lead -free solder. Fitting manufacturers shall be Elkhart Products Corporation, Mueller Industries, Nibco, or equal.
PLUMBING
220400-2
b. Alternate: Wrought copper ASME B16.22 and cast bronze ASME B16.18, with copper-tube dimensioned grooved ends. Option: Victaulic Copper-Connection. (1) Alternate: Grooved joint couplings consisting of two ductile iron housing segments cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads, grade EHP gasket, and ASTM A449 compliant bolts and nuts. Ins tallation-Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Option: Victaulic Style 607. (2) Alternate: UL classified in accordance with ANSI / NSF -61 for potable water service and shall be certified to the low lead requirements of NSF-372. (3) Alternate: Installation-Ready™ fittings for grooved end copper tubing shall be manufactured to copper -tube dimensions. Fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, with Installation-Ready™ ends, complete with PVDF (Poly Viny lidene Fluoride) and Grade “EHP” EPDM-HP [Grade ‘T’ Nitrile] gasket; and ASTM A449 electroplated steel bolts and nuts.
System shall be rated to 300 psi (2065 kPa) with Type K or L Copper Tubing.
2. Below Grade: Lead free Type K copper tubing annealed, straight lengths with lead free wrought copper solder sweat fittings and lead-free solder. Pipe manufacturers shall be Mueller Industries, Cambridge -Lee Industries, Cerro Flow Products, or equal. F itting manufacturers shall be Elkhart Products Corporation, Muel ler Industries, Nibco, or equal.
B. Domestic Water Piping from 5 Feet Outside Building:
1. 1½” and Smaller: Schedule 80 PVC Type I conforming to ASTM D1785 with Schedule 80, Type I, solvent welded fittings.
2. Thrust blocks shall be provided at all offsets, tees, and valves. Thrust block sizing as recommended by the latest code being enforced.
3. Piping connections at water meter 3” and larger shall be ductile iron.
C. Condensate Piping: Type "M" copper tubing, hard drawn with wrought copper or cast brass fittings, andlead freesolder joints.Pipe manufacturers shall be Mueller Industries, Cambridge- Lee Industries, Cerro Flow Products, or equal. Fitting manufacturers shall be Elkhart Products Corporation, Mueller Industries, Nibco, or equal.
D. Indirect Waste Piping: TypeDWV copper drainage tubing with cast brass fittings.
2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES:
A. Unions: In copper tubing 3" and smaller, Lead free Nibco 733 -LF, Elkhart Products Corporation, or equal.
B. Isolation Unions: Wilkins lead free DUxLC, Watts,Zurn, or equal for sizes3" and smaller.
C. Pipe labels and valve tags shall be manufactured b y W.H. Brady, Seton, Emedco or equal.
PLUMBING
220400-3
2.4 VALVES:
A. Water:
1. Ball Valves: Bronze 2 Piece, full port, lead free ANSI/NSF 372 certified sizes ½” through 2” Nibco T-585-80 LF/S -585-80LF, Apollo #77CLF, Milwaukee Valve UPBA400 (FNPT)/UPBA450 (sweat), or equal, full port, bronze lead free, or legend #T/S 901.
2. Gate Valves: Bronze class 125 lead free ANSI/NSF 372 certified sizes 1 ½” shall be Nibco, S/T-113-LF, Milwaukee Val ve UP105 (FN Sizes 3” and larger Nibco F603RW, or Legend TIS-415, or equal.
3. Check Valves:
a. Silent check, 2-½” and smaller: Lead free ANSI/NSF 372 certified class 125, bronze, Y-Pattern, horizontal swing, renewable disc, threaded or solder; Nibco T/S-413-Y-LF series, Milwaukee Val ve UP509 (FNPT)/UP1509 (Sweat) (Bronze Disc), Apollo, or equal.
4. Balancing Valves: Lead free bronze body/brass ball construction with glass and
5. Stops: Lead free angle or straight valve loose key with escutcheon at wall penetration. Stop and escutcheon shall be chrome plated T&S Brass, Nibco, BrassCraft, or equal.
6. Water Pressure Regulator (PRV): Sizes 2½” and Larger: Automatic Control Valve, 304 stainless steel with EPDM diaphragm, Watts 115-LASD, Zurn, or equal. Sizes 2” and Smaller: Wilkins #500xL.
B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer (RPBFP): Lead free 175 PSI at 140 0F, bronze body, celcon check seats, stainless steel relief valve seats, bronze body ball valve test cocks, no nrising stem gate valves (threaded for ¾” through 2” and flanged f or 2 -½” through 10 ”), air gap drain fitting (route drain to receptor); Wilkins #975XL2 2” and smaller; #375XL 2½” and larger,Watts, Apollo, or equal.
2.5 FLASHINGS:
A. "Stoneman" No. 1100-4, GAF, Menards, or equal, four pound, seamless lead flashin g assembly. Flashing shall have reinforced boot complete with cast -iron counterflashing sleeve and Permaseal waterproofing compound. All vent pipes shall be terminated 12" above the roof. (Roof penetrations per roofing inspector standards.)
2.6 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ACCESS PANELS:
A. Hangers and supports shall comply with the currently adopted editio n of the California Plumbing Code and the IAPMO installation stand ards. Provide seismic support per the California Building Code.
B. Hangers and Supports:
PLUMBING
220400-4
1. Split Ring or Loop Hangers with Swivel Adju ster, Solid Rods and Rod Sockets: B - line, Unistrut, Tolco, or equal.
2. Concrete Inserts: B -line, Unistrut, Tolco, or equal. Po wer driven anchors are not acceptable.
3. Trapeze Hangers: B -line, Unistrut, Tolco, or equal channel with pipe clamps and guides as required (include type to be used in submittal).
4. Riser Clamps: B-line, Unistrut, Tolco, or equal.
5. Offset Pipe Clamps: B-line, Unistrut, Tolco, or equal.
6. Provide and install galvanized pipe saddle at hange rs under pipe inserts for insulated piping.
7. Floor or Roof Supports: Erico, Dura-Blok, Mifab, or equal.
C. Secondary Pipe Positioning & Supports: Makeshift, field devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as with the use of scrap framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that comply wit h IAPMO PS 42 -96. These shall be Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE support systems or Owner-approved equivalent.
D. Plenum Installations: Use pipe supports and hangers that meet ASTM E -84 25/50 standards, such as the Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE Flame Fighter™ or Owner- approved equivalent.
E. For vertical mid -span supports of piping 4” and under, use Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE Stout Brackets™ with Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE Stout Clamps or two-hole pipe clamps (MSS Type 26), by B-Line, Tolco, or equal.
F. Support of piping, tubing, and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products, specific toeach application. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed.
2.7 SLEEVES:
A. General:
1. Where pipes pass through concrete, masonry, or stud walls, or pass through ceilings, provide rust-proof sleeves of the size required.
2. Provide UL-listed fire rated sealant (specialty products, or equal) at all penetrations of fire-rated assemblies and between buildings along property line.
2.8 OTHER PRODUCTS:
A. Provide all other products necessary for complete installation and operation including rough-ins as required for washers and dryers. Such products shall be subject to the review of the Architect.
2.9 FIRE STOP PROTECTION:
--
PLUMBING
220400-5
A. Provide slab, wall and roof penetrations with fire stop in accordance with chapter 15 o f the latest CPC.
B. System shall be installed as tested in accordance with ASTM E119, ASTM E 8 14, UL 263 or UL 1479.
C. Fire stop shall have a fire-resistance rating of not less than one (1) hour and shall match the rating of the slab, wall or roof assembly.
D. System shall be equal to HoldRite Hybrid Flame Sleeving System, Pro-Set Pipe/Sleeve system, Hilti, or equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION:
A. Install insulation after piping has been installed, tested, and accepted and after pipes are in a clean, dry condition. All joints in insulation shall be butted firmly together and sealed with jacket lap strip.
B. Apply insulation to all fittings and valve bodies.Flanges and unions shall not be covered.
C. Where the insulation supports the weight of the pipe, in stall a 12" insert of rigid galvanized steel, at each pipe clamp or hanger, an insert of rig id "Kaylo" 12" long, shall be installed between pipe and hanger. High density fiberglass inserts shall be installed with galvanized saddles.
D. Condensate drain pipe shall be completely insulated throughout the entire system.
3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION:
A. Copper tubing shall be in stalled in accordance with the latest edition of the Copper Development Association “Copper Tube Handbook.” Joints in copper tubing shall be made by first thoroughly cleaning the surface ofthe pipe and fittings, applying a copperized flux and sweating with lead free solder for all water piping and condensate piping abovegrade and below grade.
B. Alternate: Grooved Joints: Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published installation instructions.Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the areafrom pipe end to (and including) groove. Gasket shall be manufactured by the coupling manufacturer and verified as suitable for the intended service. A factory trained representative (direct employee) of the coupling manufacturer shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and product installation. The representative shall periodically visit thejob site and review installation to ensure best practices in grooved joint installation arebeing followed. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.
C. All pipe shall be carefully cleaned before installation. The ends of threaded steel pipe shall be reamed out full size with a long tapered reamer so as to be partiallybell-mouthed and perfectly smooth. Openings in pipes, drains, fitting apparatus and equipment shall be kept covered or plugged to prevent foreign substance from entering.
PLUMBING
220400-6
D. Flush out allcondensate drains with water so as to obtain free flow. Remove all obstructions and defects discovered. Remove and re place items already installed and found to be defective or which has had grade or joints disturbed at no additional cost.
E. Run piping free of traps, sags, or bends. Grade and valve for complete drainage and control of the system.
F. All piping shall be installed to maintain headroom and keep passageways and openings clear.
Install piping parallel a nd straight with adjacent walls or ceilings to present a uniform appearance. Allpiping, except where noted otherwise on plans, shall beconcealed inwalls or above ceilings. Route piping to avoid electrical rooms. Do not route waste piping above kitchen areas. Do not route plastic pipe in return air plenums unlessthe pipe is plenum-rated with a flame spread index of 25 or less and a smoke developed index of 50or less.
G. Bending or forcing of pipe will not be allowed. Use fittings for all offsets or changes in alignment of piping.
H. Proper provision shall be made for expansion and contraction by means of fittings and anchors and supportsof all pipingas described in the current editions of IAPMO Installation Standards 5 and 9.
I. Proper provisions shall be made for seismic joints by means of seismic expansion joint fittings capable of movement in all directions in accordance with Structuralseismic movement requirements.
J. Bushings and long screw fittings will not be allowed.
K. Unions shall be installed after each sc rew-type valve, connections for all equipment, appliances, and as required for erection and maintenance. No unions shall be installed in concealed locations. Unions are not required on installations using grooved joint couplings.
Install isolation unions or waterway fittings on all connections between dissimilar metalsand at connections to all waterheating equipment and storage tanks.
L. No holes for pipe or equi pment will be allowed in any structural members without written consent of the Architect. Where pipes are to pass through or interfere with any member, or where notching, boring or cutting of the structure is necessary, the work shall be done by the General Contractor as directed. Isolate pipe from coming in direct contact with the structure.
M. Unless otherwise specified herein, all equipment and fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printedinstructions andrecommendations.
N. Any minor changes in work, whichhave not been installed, shall be made by the Contractor without additional compensation, except changes which are caused by architectural revisions resulting in an increase or decrease of the size or quantity of the materials specified or indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall submit an estimate of the cost of orcredit for such changes which are not judged to be of a minor nature and shall proceed only upon the written authorization of the Architect.
O. All piping shall be isolated from other piping, studs, ducts, any part of the building, framing, hangers, conduit,etc., with 1" strips of hair felt or pipe isolators.
P. For condensate piping, provide minimum 3" deepseal trap and plugged cleanout tee at the equipment connection. Slope piping at ⅛ " per foot minimum.
PLUMBING
220400-7
AA. Provide and install polished chromium plate split ring escutcheons for pipes exposed in the building.
3.3 CLEANOUTS:
A. Cleanouts shall be caulked into or clamped to pipe where shown on plans. Install under counter tops where they occur or in walls to avoid exposed condition. Cleanouts shall be accessible in all cases and shall be brought to surface on "Y" branches. All cleanouts shall be provided with removable floor or wall plate as specified in Part 2.
3.4 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORTS:
A. Installation shall comply with the currently accepted edition of the California Plumbing Code.
B. Piping shall be fir mly held in place by adjustable split ring malle able iron hangers, supports and pipe res ts, located adjacent to fitting at each offset or change of direction, at the ends of branches over 5' long, at base of riser pipes and along piping where necessary to prevent sags, bends, or vibration. All hangers and supports shall be of design which will support weight of pipe, fluid and insulation and prevent sagging.
C. Pipe clamps shall be heavy gauge iron, factory fabricated to fit against supporting surface when installed. Makeshift devices will not be acceptable. Plumbing tape isnot allowed.
D. Seismically brace all piping and equipment as specified in Section 23 00 00 and per California Building Code.
E. Hangers supported by concrete structure shall be attached by cast -iron manufactured concrete inserts installed atthe time concrete is poured and eachinsert shall be provided with through rods lapped over structural reinforcing. Power driven fasteners are not acceptable.
F. Hangers supported by structural steel shapes sha ll be attached by cast -iron clamps designed for use on the specific steel shape and equipped with retainers.
G. All hangers shall be attached to halter rods by means of adjustable swivel, turnbuckle or double nut arrangement to allow height adjustment.
H. Vertical piping shall be suitably supported from the b uilding structure where required by means of malleable iron or steel pipe clamps of ample size, either bolted or welded to the pipe and supported at the floor slab. Supports shall also act as anchors to allo w for expansion and contraction of the piping. Provide ru bber isolators for clamps w here required for elimination of vibration and sound transmission to the structure. Vertical "no-hub" components shall be secured at each joint and at each floor.
I. Miscellaneous Supports: Floor and wall brackets, etc., shall be provided where required in accordance with the best standard practice of the trade. In the event additional structural steel is required to transmit loads to maintain structure, same shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
J. Support of piping, tubing, and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products, specific to each application. Makeshift, field-devised methods shall not be allowed. --
PLUMBING
220400-8
K. Horizontal Cast-Iron Piping:
1. Supports shall maintain alignment and prevent sagging and shall be placed within 18" of th e hub or joint. When the developed length between supports exceeds 4 feet, they shall be provided at each side of every joint. Supports shall also be provided at each horizontal branch connection. Suspended lines shall be braced to prevent horizontal movement as specified in Section 23 00 00.
2. Hanger rod sizes shall be in accordance with Table 31 3.6 of the California Plumbing Code.
3. Trap arms and similar branches shall be fir mly secured against movement in any direction. Closet bends shall be stabilized b y firmly clamping and blocking. Where vertical closet stubs are used they shall be completely stabilized against all movement.
L. Hangers for horizontal copper tubing and steel pipe shall be spaced in accordance with Table 313.3 of the California Plumbing Code.
M. Support pipes on roof with pads and anchors per the roofing contractor.
N. All hangers for water piping shall be sized for use over trisolator or 1-inch hair felt.
3.5 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS:
A. Provide standard weight black steel pipe sleeves for each pipe passing through foundation, walls, partitions, roofs, and ceiling. Pipe sleevesshall be installed flushwith wall or floor.
1. Set pipe sleeves in place before concrete is poured.
2. For uninsulated pipe, provide sleeves that are two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through the opening, or provide a minimum of ½” clearance between inside of the opening and outside of the pipe.
3. For insulated pipe, provide sleeves of adequate size to accommodate the full thickness of pipe covering with clearance for packing and caulking.
B. Caulk the space between sleeve and pipe or pipe covering.
C. Finish and Escutcheons:
1. Smooth up rough edges around sleeves with plaster or spackling compound.
2. Provide escutcheons on all pipes exposed to view where passing through walls, partitions, ceilings, and similar locations.
a. Size the escutcheons to fit pipe and covering.
b. Hold escutcheons in place with set screw, or set in full bed of sealant. c. Where directed by Architect, paint escutcheon to match adjacent finish color.
D. Sleeve diameter for piping through a masonry wall above grade or through floors shall
PLUMBING
220400-9
be #10 gauge g alvanized sheet steel and shall extend completely through the walls or floor finishing flush on both sides. The sleeve shall be 1” larger than the pipe with caulking to make the opening airtight.
E. Sleeves through the fire walls or floors shall be packed with UL Listed fireproof wicking or other suitable noncombustible materialto maintain the fire rating of the wall or floor assembly.
3.6 VALVES:
A. Provide valves in water and gas systems. L ocate and arrange so as to give complete regulation of apparatus and fixtures.
B. Provide valves in at least the following locations:
1. Shut-off valves at piping supply to the facility.
2. For shutoff of risers and branch mains.
3. For flushing and sterilizing the system.
4. Pressure regulator at the water supply to the facility.
C. Locate valves for easy accessibility and maintenance.
3.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTION:
A. Protect plumbing fixtures, faucets with hose connections, and other equipment having plumbing connections against possible back-siphonage.
B. Arrange for testing of backflow devices as required by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
C. Provide a reduced pressure backflow preventer at water connections for HVAC equipment, irrigation systems, pool and spa equipment, carbonation units, and as required per code.
D. When supplying equipment with softened make -up water, provide the following permanent sign at the backflow device: “Warning: Supplied by Soft Water.” E. Provide an approved receptor on accordance with the California Plumbing Code 2019 to receive discharged water from reduced pressure backflow preventors.
3.8 CONCRETE:
A. Provide concrete required for the work of this Section in strict accordance with pertinent provisions of Division 3.
3.9 FIXTURE INSTALLATION:
A. All plumbing fixtures shall be bedded and caulked along joint at walls, counter tops , and other intersecting surfaces with white adhesive caulking.
B. Fit-up connections to equipment (furnished by others) shall be provided with valves,
PLUMBING
220400-10
unions, flexible connectors, and adapters to make a final connection. Piping stubouts for equipment will be extended to make the final connection. The connection shall be made with devices recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Field verify exact point of connection prior to start of work.
3.10 SEISMIC RESTRAINT:
A. General:
1. Furnish and install seismic restraint for all piping, equipment, etc., installed under the contract. All restraints shall meet the requirements of the current California Building Code.
2. Seismic restraints shall be designed andinstalled in accordance with good engineering practice to the approval of a Professional Engineer. The design and installation of restraints shall be generally in accordance with the current editions of the California Building Code all of which shall form and become a part of this installation.
3.11 PROTECTION OF PIPING SYSTEMS:
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install and maintain pipe and equipment which is reasonably clean and free from rust, dirt, scale, etc. Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide temporary airtight covers at all pipe and equipment openings.
B. Before turning the systems over to the Owner, all piping systems shall be thoroughly flushed of all scale and dirt. Drains shall be installed at the low points to facilitate flushing of the piping systems.
3.12 PAINTING:
A. General:
1. Prime paint all ferrous metal items, excep t items to be encased in concrete, areas adjacent to field welds, and roof drains.
2. Clean all items free of loose mill scale, rust, and other contaminants.
3. For roof-mounted equipment, provide factory prefinish on all exposed surfaces.
4. Touch-up scratches and abrasions to be invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of 5’0”.
3.13 REQUIREMENTS FOR FINAL INSPECTION:
A. All requirements shall be completed prior to final inspections.
B. Thoroughly clean all parts of the piping, valves, and equipment. Exposed parts which are to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, oil and grease spots.
Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out.
C. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to remove rust and other spots, leaving a smooth and clean surface. Trap elements shall be removed during the cleaning and flushing period, after which they shall be replaced and adjusted.
PLUMBING
220400-11
D. Electrical device covers shall not be installed until the finished coating of paint is completed. Device handles and receptacles shall be covered and/or protected during the painting operation to preserve the original factory bright new finish.
E. All potable water lines shall be sterilized with chlorine. The chlorine residual concentration shall indicate not less than 50 parts per million (ppm) and shall be retained for a period of not less than 24 hours. Repeat procedure if the residual concentration has decreased below 25 ppm. After test is in compliance with this specification, flushthe system until the residual is not more than 0.5ppm. All work and certification of performance must be done by qualified personnel. Submit certification to Architect.
NOTE: During construction phase, install Tee's and ball valves at locations directed and as required to facilitate sterilization and testing. Identify and indicate on the as - built plans the location of valves and ensure that they are accessible and are in a position not to cause cross-connections or artificial pressure loss in the system.
3.14 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS:
A. No piping work, fixtures, or equipment shall be concealed or covered until inspected by the Architect/Owner's Representative, who shall be notified when the work is ready for inspection. All work shall be completely installed, t ested as required by local code, this section and the State Ordinances and State Safety Orders, and shall be leak-tight before inspection is requested. All tests sh all be repeated as required by those making the inspection.
B. All domestic water piping shall be flushed out, tested at 150 psig and shall be left under pressure of supply main or a minimum of 50 psi, whichever is greater, for the balance of the construction period. No air testing is allowed. Tests are to be applied for a minimum period of one hour.
C. Condensate piping within the building shall be tested with a minimum of 10 -foot head at each joint for a minimum of 3 hours with no loss in head.
D. Final pressures at the end of the test period for all piping systems shall be no more nor less than that caused by expansion or contraction of the test medium due to temperature changes.
E. All protective coating systems shall be visually inspected for breaks in the coating system.
Any holidays revealed shall be promptly repaired per manufacturer’s instructions for repair of damaged pipe coatings.
F. Cross-Connection Tests By Testing Agency: Comply with NFPA 99. Pressurize each system with nitrog en in accordance with Table 3. Check 100 percent of the outlets in each system. Include anesthesia gas evacuation in vacuum systems.
3.15 DRAWINGS OF RECORD:
A. In addition to the "As -Built" drawings required, two complete sets of printed mechanical drawings sha ll be provided by the Archit ect for the purpose of showing a complete picture of the work as actually installed.
PLUMBING
220400-12
B. These drawings shall serve as work progress report sheets and the Contractor shall make all notations, neat and legible, thereon daily as the w ork proceeds. The drawings shall be available for inspection at all times and shall be kept at the job at a location designated.
C. At the completion of the work, these as -built drawings shall be signed by the Contractor indicating approval thereof, dated and returned to the Architect.
D. The dimensions, locations and invert elevations of buried piping shall be accurately recorded on the as -built drawings. Dimensions shall be from permanent building walls (not from column lines).
3.16 GUARANTEE:
A. All work under this section shall be guaranteed in writing in accordance with the "Mechanical General Provisions," Section 23 00 00.
B. All material except as otherwise noted shall be new, free from defect and of the quality and rating shown or specified.
C. Any defect due to missingor improper material or faulty workmanship existing or developing during the warranty period shall be corrected and the resulting damage repaired.
D. The warranty period shall be one year from date of acceptance of the project, except for items guaranteed by the manufacturer for a longer period.
3.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTION AND SERVICE MANUAL:
A. The Contractor shall carefully prepare an operating instruction and service manual for the entire system including all equipment, excepting Owner -furnished equipment. The manual shall be submitted for review to the Architect at least 30 days prior to completion of the work. Failure to submit manual will delay final inspection and acceptance of the work. Contents shall be bound in a durable loose-leaf binder, complete with index.
B. The following items s hall be included in the manual. This list may not be complete and is to be used as a guide:
1. Part numbers of all replaceable items.
2. Manufacturer's cut sheets and rating tables, including brochures on all fixtures, equipment and materials installed.
3. Oiling, lubrication and greasing instructions, including maintenance time schedule.
4. Test data on all equipment.
5. Serial numbers of all principal pieces of equipment.
6. The names, addresses, phone and emergency phone numbers of the manufacturers’ and subcontractors’suppliers.
7. Valve chart indicating location of valves for the project.
PLUMBING
220400-13
8. Written guarantee.
9. Prints of complete as-built drawings, signed by the Contractor.
10. Reviewed submittal data and shop drawings in binder.
11. Test and balance data and copies of building inspe ctions check lists signed off by the Inspector.
12. Potable water piping sterilization certificate.
13. Pipe and equipment identification schedule.
C. After review of the manual by the Engineer, two copies of each manual shall be furnished for distribution.
3.18 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT:
A. Identify all equipment with nameplates bearing equipment name and number using 1 -½" wide, white Bakelite with ½" black letters permanently mounted in a conspicuous place.
B. Markings: Each piping system shall be identified and the direction of flow indicated by means of legends, color bands and flow arrows. The markings shall be applied after all painting and cleaning of the piping and insulation is completed. The stick -ons shall be taped all around the pipe in addition to being cemented on.
C. Location:
1. The identification shall be applied to all piping except those located in furred spaces without access to permit entrance of personnel and piping buried in the ground or concrete.
2. The symbol and flow arrow shall be applied at all valve locations, at all points where piping enters or leaves a wall, partition, cluster of piping or similar obstruction and at approximately 30-foot intervals on runs with at least one symbol or flow arrow in each space or room.
3. Variation or changes in lo cations and spacing may be made only with the direction of the Architect to meet conditions.
4. Wherever two or more pipes run parallel, the printed symbol and other markings shall be applied in the same relative locations so as to be in ei ther vertical or horizontal linearity, whichever the case may be.
5. The markings shall be located so as to be conspicuous and legible at all times from any reasonable point.
D. Sizes shall be as recommended in ANSI A13.1.
E. As an alternate to the above, the Contractor may submit a system of painted stenciled letters on a color coded background per ANSI A13.1. Complete data, color chart and sizes shall be submitted for review.
PLUMBING
220400-14
F. Valve charts shall be provided for each piping system and shall consist of schematic drawings of piping lay outs showing and identifying each valve and describing its function. Upon completion of the work and after approval by the Architect, one copy of each chart, sealed to rigid backboard with clear lacquer placed under glass and framed, shall be mounted in the mechanical room where directed by the Owner. Two additional unmounted copies shall be delivered to the Owner. Valve lists shall be furnished as required.
G. Name Tags: Provide 1¼" plastic square of 1¼" round with ¼" letters forall valves. Black letters on white tags and marked for type of service intended. Attach tags to valve handles by "S" hooks. Furnish four printed lists showing valve number, service and location. One of these lists shall be individually framed with metal frames and glass fronts and mounted where directed by the Owner after approval. One additional copy shall be furnished as required.
END OF SECTION
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 230000 - 1
SECTION 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS:
The general conditions and Division 1 are a part of this section and the contract for this work and apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein. This section, 230000, applies to all Division 23 categories, including but not limited to:
Section 22 04 00 Plumbing
23 08 00 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
23 09 23 Direct Digital Controls (DDC) System for HVAC
A. Reference to Other Sections: The applicable requirements from the above sections shall form a part of the mechanical work and each section shall consult the other sections in detail for general and specific requirements.
1.2 SCOPE:
These Division 23 specifications and the accompanying drawings are intended to comprise the furnishing of all labor, and the furnishing and installing of all materials, equipment and supplies as specified herein and required for the satisfactory completion by the Contractor of all work pertaining to mechanical trades.
1.3 EXPLANATION OF DRAWINGS AND REFERENCE TO SCHEDULES:
A. The drawings and these specifications are complementary to each other in that all apparatus, materials and equipment outlined in the drawings and/or specified herein shall be considered essential to the contract.
B. The specifications are intended to describe the quality and character of the materials and equipment and methods of installation. All miscellaneous items of work and materials necessary for the completion of the installation shall be provided, whether or not mentioned in the specifications or shown on the drawings.
C. Space allotted, clearances, access, electrical data, structural supports, etc., on drawings, is for equipment models and sizes as listed in schedules on plans. The Contractor shall assume the responsibility for the coordination with other trades required in the use of equal or substitute equipment or materials and pay all difference in cost arising from such substitutions, regardless of approval.
D. Separate Sections cover the Site Work, Architectural Work and the Electrical Work. The Contractor shall familiarize themselves with the entire specification.
E. Should there be any question as to the scope of the work for which the Contractor is responsible, they shall ask the Architect for an interpretation before submitting their bid.
In the event that the Contractor finds discrepancies or omissions or is in doubt as to the exact meaning of the plans and/or specifications, they shall, before submitting bid, contact the Mechanical Engineer for clarification.
F. For purposes of clearness and legibility, drawings are diagrammatic and, although size and location of equipment are drawn to scale wherever possible, the
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 00 00 - 2
Contractor shall make use of all data in all the contract documents and shall verify this information at building site.
G. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes, and suggest proper routes to conform to structure, avoid obstructions and preserve clearances.
However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets and beam cans, and it shall be the work of the Contractor to make the installation in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstruction, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear.
H. It is intended that all apparatus be located symmetrical with architectural elements.
Refer to architectural details in completing the correlating work.
I. The Contractor shall fully inform themselves regarding any and all peculiarities and limitations of the spaces available for the installation of all work and materials furnished and installed under the contract. They shall exercise due and particular caution to determine that all parts of their work are made quickly and easily accessible.
J. The Contractor shall study all drawings and specifications to determine any conflict with ordinances and statutes. Any errors or omissions shall be reported, and any changes shall be shown in the as-built drawings and the additional work performed at no cost to the Owner.
K. The submittal of bid shall indicate that the Contractor has examined the site and the drawings and has included all required allowances in their bid. They shall also determine in advance and make allowances for the methods of installing and connecting the equipment, the means of getting equipment in to place and they shall make themselves familiar with all the requirements of the contract. No allowance will be made for any error resulting from the Contractor's failure to visit job site and to review drawings, and bid shall include costs for all required drawings and changes as outlined above.
L. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent, the general location and arrangement of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. Equipment, piping and ductwork shall be located to avoid interference with electrical, plumbing and structural features. All locations for mechanical work shall be checked and coordinated with the building, structural, electrical work.
M. If any conflicts occur necessitating departures from the Contract Drawings, details of departures and reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practical for written approval, and the piping, ductwork, fixtures or equipment affected shall not be installed until approval is received.
N. Reference to Drawing Schedules:
1. Refer to equipment schedule for unit identification number and corresponding capacity and design requirements.
2. Wherever schedules or notes appear on the Drawings or in the specifications in which sizes and capacities of equipment are indicated, the equipment furnished and installed under this contract shall meet the following requirements under operating conditions.
1.4 DEFINITIONS:
A. "Provide" shall mean "provide complete in place," that is, "furnish and install." B. "Piping" shall mean pipes, fittings, valves and all like pipe accessories connected thereto.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 00 00 - 3
C. Pressure ratings specified, such as for valves and the like, is the design working pressure and is for and with reference to the fluid which the device will serve.
D. "Ductwork" shall mean ducts, plenums, compartments, casings or any like devices, including the building structure, which is used to convey or contain air.
E. "Building Boundary" shall mean exterior building walls.
F. "Mechanical Work" shall mean all work specified and shown in the Division 23, "Mechanical," categories. Mechanical Work generally includes: Plumbing, a n d Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning.
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS:
A. All work, material or equipment shall comply with the requirements of codes, ordinances and regulations of the local Government having jurisdiction at the location of the work, including the regulations of serving utilities, and any participating Government agencies having jurisdiction.
B. The latest editions of the following Specifications, Codes and Standards shall form a part of these specifications, the same as if herein written out in full, and all materials and installations include but not be limited to:
1. CMC (California Mechanical Code)
2. ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning)
3. UL (Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.)
4. AMCA (Air Moving and Conditioning Associates)
5. California State Division of Industrial Safety
6. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards
7. CBC (California Building Code)
8. NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)
9. San Diego County Codes
10. California Administrative Code, Title 24
11. Requirements of the State Fire Marshall
12. National Electrical Code
13. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
14. AGA (American Gas Association)
15. OSHA
16. CPC (California Plumbing Code)
17. CEC (California Energy Code)
C. No requirement of these drawings and specifications shall be construed to void any of the provisions of the above standards. No apparatus, equipment, device or construction shall be installed which will provide a cross connection permitting any backflow or siphonage from any source into the domestic water supply system.
1.6 PERMITS AND FEES:
Obtain all permits, patent rights, and licenses that are required for the performing of the work by all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, or orders of any officer and/or body,
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 00 00 - 4
give all notices necessary in connection therewith, and pay all fees relating thereto and all costs and expenses incurred on account thereof. No work shall be covered before inspection by the jurisdictional authority and the Architect.
1.7 SUPERVISIONAND COOPERATION:
A. The Contractor shall include the services of experienced superintendents for each sub- section who shall be constantly in charge of the work, together with the qualified journeymen, helpers, and laborers, required to properly unload, install, connect, adjust, start, operate and test the work involved, including equipment and materials furnished by others.
B. The work under this section shall be in cooperation with the work of other trades to prevent conflict or interference and to aid rapid completion of the overall project.
1.8 PROJECT SITE VISIT:
Periodic visits to the project site by the Engineer are for the expressed purpose of verifying compliance with the contract documents. Such site visits shall not be construed as inspections, construction supervision, i.e., the Engineer assumes no responsibility for providing a safe place for the performance of the work by the Contractor or the Contractor's employees or the safety of the supplies of the Contractor. Neither shall such site visits relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the discovery of their own errors and the correction of them, nor of the responsibility of properly performing the work.
1.9 COORDINATION:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all information, drawings or layouts of equipment or work under this section which affect the work of the other trades.
B. In case changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are necessary due to developed conditions in the construction, or rearrangement of furnishings, or equipment, these changes shall be made without extra cost to the Owner, provided the change is ordered before work directly connected is installed, and no extra materials are required.
1.10 EXISTINGUTILITIES:
A. The location of utilities shown on the plans is the best-known information available at time of d esign. The Contractor shall contact the appropriate agencies and confirm the information and make arrangements for connection thereto, prior to excavation and installation of any piping or systems.
B. Prior to installation of any waste and soil lines the Contractor shall physically verify whether the building sewer can be installed and properly connected to the sewer main.
Any work requiring added expense which is caused by the Contractor to make such physical verification shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.11 UTILITY SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION:
All water and electric power used for construction shall be paid for by the Contractor.
1.12 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Equipment and materials shall be submitted to the (Architect / Owner / Developer / Owners Representative) for approval within 30 days after award of Contract and prior to fabrication or purchase of equipment and materials.
B. Installation of materials or ordering of equipment prior to approval of submittals is done entirely at the risk of the Contractor.
C. Unless otherwise specifically directed in the following specifications, the submittals by
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 00 00 - 5
the Contractor to the (Architect / Owner / Developer / Owners Representative)) shall be as follows:
1. Submit all items at one time in a neat and orderly manner as individual electronic, Portable Document Format (PDF) indexed files. A partial submittal will not be acceptable.
2. Reference catalog cuts and brochures of products to proper paragraph in specifications. Furnish numerical index by specification article number, listing product name, catalog number and reference to page number of submittal brochure.
3. Cross reference individual catalog numbers of substitute products to number of specified materials.
4. Submit manufacturers' certification that equipment meets or exceeds the minimum requirements as specified.
5. Where materials, equipment and installations are specified to conform with societies or agencies such as ANSI, ASHRAE, SMACNA, etc., submit certification of such compliance.
6. The submittal shall be complete and with manufacturer’s selection data and information properly tagged to match equipment schedules and marked to show, among other things, material capacity and performance to meet capacities or performance as specified or indicated. Arrange the submittals in the same sequence as the specifications and reference in the upper right -hand corner, the particular specification provision for which each submittal is intended.
Incomplete submittals will be rejected.
7. The Contracto r is responsible for confirmation of code approval of material and equipment. Certification of code conformance by the manufacturer shall be submitted for:
a. Water heaters.
b. Backflow preventors.
8. If the Contractor submits a product that is specified, acomplete set of brochures, rating tables, etc., is still required for future reference.
9. Review of the submittal is only for general conformance with design concept of project and general compliance with information given in the contract documents. The Contractor is responsible for confirmation and correlation of the dimensions, quantities and sizes, for information that pertains to fabrication methods or construction techniques, and for coordination of work of all trades. Deviations from drawings and specifications shall be clearly and completely indicated (by a separate letter) in the submittal.
10. For items, which are not manufactured, and which have to be specifically fabricated, including drawings and typical duct construction and complicated portions of ductwork as electronic, Portable Document Format (PDF) files and detail description shall be submitted. Shop drawings shall be submitted with such promptness as to allow ample time for examination and any re-submittal.
D. For duct and piping shop drawing development, the contractor shall obtain the most current architectural, structural and electrical CAD/Revit files. Files shall be overlaid on to mechanical duct and piping shop drawings files using Navisworks by Autodesk for clash detection by the contractor’s BIM Coordinator.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 00 00 - 6
1.13 SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Substitution of an article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction, other than those specified by name, make or catalog number is not permitted before the bid date. The contractor awarded the project, may propose substitutions as part of the submittal package as value engineering items. Written approval cannot be finalized until submittals are examined and credit to the owner is established.
B. It is the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate substituted materials and equipment with all trades. If the use of substituted equipment results in an increase in the cost, including the work of other trades, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for payment of said increase in cost.
1.14 GUARANTEE:
A. In addition to the guarantees required elsewhere, all work, materials and equipment provided under the mechanical sections shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner. Should any trouble develop during this period due to defective materials or faulty workmanship, the Contractor shall immediately furnish all necessary labor and materials to correct the trouble without cost to the Owner. The Contractor, under this guarantee, shall be responsible for all damages to any part of the premises caused by equipment furnished under this section.
B. Furnish written certified guarantee, in acceptable form, to the Owner, against defective workmanship, materials and operating equipment. Further guarantee to rebalance and adjust entire system, or any part thereof as required for perfect operation for a period of at least one year after acceptance. Compressors shall have five-year warranty. Repair, replace and make satisfactorily operative any and all defective items and work, holding the Owner free from any cost and liability in connection therewith, for the term of the guarantee.
1.15 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES:
A. Existing services required to stay in operation in areas not remodeled shall be maintained rerouted or otherwise provided with temporary connection to prevent interruptions.
B. If impossible to prevent interruptions, they shall be performed during "off-hours" and coordinated with the Owner's Representative.
C. Provide a minimum of seven (7) days written notice of interruption. Do not interrupt services without written consent of the Owner.
1.16 DAMAGE BY LEAKS:
The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the grounds, walks, roads, buildings, furnishings, piping systems, electrical systems and their equipment and contents, caused by leaks in the piping systems being installed or having been installed herein. They shall repair at their expense all damage so caused.
1.17 EMERGENCY REPAIRS:
The Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in operation without voiding the Contractor's guarantee bond nor relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities.
1.18 DEMOLITION:
A. Demolition, capping and rerouting shall be performed as shown and as required to accommodate new construction.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 00 00 - 7
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
The specification of the mechanical products is detailed in the individual specification sections of Division 23.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATIONINSTRUCTIONS:
A. The requirements of "mechanical" installation is detailed in the individual specification sections of Division 23. In addition, the following general requirements shall apply:
1. Obtain Manufacturer's printed installation instruction to aid in properly executing work of installing equipment whenever such instructions are available. Submit three copies of such instructions to the Architect prior to time of installation for use of supervising the work.
2. Erect equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner. Align, level and adjust for satisfactory operation. Install so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be made readily, and so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviation from arrangements shown on drawings may be made, as approved by the Architect.
3.2 PROTECTION OF PIPING SYSTEMS:
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install and maintain pipe and equipment which is reasonably clean and free from rust, dirt, scale, etc. Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide temporary airtight covers at all pipe and equipment openings.
B. Before turning the systems over to the Owner, all piping systems shall be thoroughly flushed of all scale and dirt. Drains shall be installed at the low points to facilitate flushing of the piping systems.
3.3 PROTECTION OF AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS:
A. The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection to keep dirt and foreign matter from getting into the air handling system.
B. Ductwork and equipment shall not be left open for any extended period of time. Open section and open fittings shall be capped wherever they occur until such time as final connections are made to equipment, grilles, register, etc. as required by SMACNA IAQ Guidelines.
3.4 PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
Do not route liquid filled pressure and drain piping over electrical equipment, switchboards motor control centers and the like. When unavoidable, install galvanized drain pans to prevent liquid from dripping or squirting onto such equipment.
3.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:
A. See "Earthwork" section of the specifications for requirements. In addition, the following shall apply:
1. Execute all excavation to grades to accommodate elevations indicated and where invert elevations are not indicated, provide minimum coverage (above top of pipes) as follows:
a. Any piping under building slab (top of pipe to underside of slab) 18-inches. b. Steel, cast iron, and copper in other locations 30-in. c. Clay and Plastic piping in other locations - 36-in.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 00 00 - 8
2. Excavation for pipes shall be cut a minimum of six-inches below the required grade.
A six-inch bed of sand or other approved material shall be then placed and properly compacted to provide an accurate grade and uniform bearing throughout the length of the pipe, except for plastic piping for which sand shall be used.
3. Sand used shall be washed river sand normally used for backfill purposes, free of clods or lumps of clay, rock, debris and rubbish.
4. Backfilling shall not be placed until the work has been inspected, tested and approved.
5. PVC piping excepted, backfill to point 12-inches above top of piping with fine earth (excavated material may be used) free of excessive amounts of clay, debris, rubbish, rocks, or clods, as approved by the Architect. Backfill above 12-inches from top of piping may be with excavated material. Apply backfill by hand in 6-inch deep layers the full width of the trench. Moisten each layer (do not flood or puddle), and hand tamp to a minimum 90 percent compaction before proceeding with the next layer of backfill. Note: PVC piping shall be backfilled with sand to a point 12-inches above top of piping, remainder of trench may be backfilled with fine earth as specified above.
6. Clods or lumps one-inch in size or larger will not be permitted in the backfill. If the excavated material is not suitable adequate material shall be provided by hauling from other locations.
7. Surplus earth or material remaining after backfilling shall be removed from the site as indicated in Section entitled "Earthwork."
8. Do not excavate under or near foundations or footings except in manner permitted and approved by the Architect. Do not backfill until installed piping has been successfully tested and approved for backfill by the jurisdictional inspector and the Architect.
3.6 RECORD DRAWINGS:
A. The Contractor shall keep an accurate dimensional record of the as-built locations of all work under this Contract. This record shall be kept up-to-date at all times on blue line prints or an electronic set of plans as the job progresses and shall be available for inspection at all times.
B. Upon completion of the work, the contractor shall obtain from the (Architect / Owner / Developer / Owners Representative) CAD/Revit files of the applicable contract documents. All changes and information contained on the Record Drawings shall be transferred to the new CAD/Revit files.
C. The Contractor shall submit one electronic, Portable Document Format (PDF) files and one CAD/Revit set of files, of the completed reproducible Record Set for approval.
Make such changes and correction as may be required for final approval.
D. When final approval is received, sign the reproducible Record Set and stamp or note "As-Built" and submit to the Architect.
E. Final observation will not be made until these approved as-built drawing files have been received by the Owner
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. Perform all cutting and fitting required for work of this Section in rough construction of the building.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 00 00 - 9
B. All patching of finished construction of building shall be performed under the section of specification covering these materials.
C. All cutting of concrete work by this Contractor shall be by core drilling or concrete sawing. No cutting or coring shall be done without first obtaining the permission of the Architect.
D. Information regarding requirements for openings, recesses, chases in the walls, partitions, framing or openings shall beprovided for work under the appropriate sections of the specifications in advance of the work. Should this be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional cutting is found to be required, this work shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. All access panels shall be approved by the Architect as to location, appearance, and finish.
3.8 VIBRATION ELIMINATION AND CONNECTORS:
Rotating or reciprocating mechanical equipment shall be mounted on or suspended from vibration isolators to prevent vibration and structural borne noise transmission to the building. Refer to each mechanical trade section of these specifications for specific details. Flexible duct connection shall be used between all fan openings and sheet metal work. Flexible connectors shall be used in piping connections to rotating or reciprocating equipment. See individual mechanical sections for specifications.
3.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR FINAL INSPECTION:
A. All of the following items must be completed prior to final inspections. No exception and no final payment will be made until all items are completed and approved. For specific requirements see the individual section in the Division 23 Category.
1. Cleaning equipment and premises
2. Test and balance of systems
3. Test and balance reports are reviewed by the Engineer
4. Service manual
5. Pipe and valve identification
6. Pipe and valve identification schedule
7. Operation tests
8. Operating instructions
9. As-built drawings
10. Certification of water sterilization
11. CALGreen and Title-24 Acceptance forms
3.10 EARTHQUAKERESTRAINT:
A. General:
B. All earthquake resistant designs for mechanical equipment, such as air handling units, water heaters, blowers, motors, ductwork, mechanical and plumbing piping, shall conform to the regulations of the California Building Code.
C. The restraints which are used to prevent disruption of the function of the piece of equipment because of the application of the horizontal force shall be such that the forces are carried to the frame of the structure in such a way that the frame will not be deflected
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 00 00 - 10
when the apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to the structure in the normal way, utilizing the attachments provided. Equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. shall be secured to withstand a force in any direction equal to the value stated in the CBC for Commercial Buildings and the CAC for Healthcare Facilities, Schools, and Public Buildings.
D. Piping:
1. All HVAC and Plumbing piping shall be secured by bracing at every fourth hanger transversely and every eighth hanger longitudinally. Bracing shall be done in accordance with the NFPA Code, and as described in paragraph "Sway Bracing for Protection against Earthquakes," of that code.
2. As approved by code authority, the SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems" may be used as a guide.
E. No sway bracing is required for pipes that are installed on very short hangers (12-inches or less).
F. As approved by the code authority a bracing system as manufactured by "Superstrut" or "Pipe Shields Inc." may be used.
3.11 ADJUSTMENTS OF SYSTEMS AND OPERATION TESTS:
A. When the work included in these specifications is complete, and at such time as directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall adjust all parts of the systems, advising the Architect when this has been done and the work is ready for their final tests. Refer to "Balancing and Testing Procedures" in Section 23 00 00.
B. The Owner may require operation of parts or all of the systems prior to final acceptance.
If it becomes necessary for temporary use of the systems before all parts are complete, the Contractor shall adjust all parts as far as possible in order to make such temporary use as effective as possible. After temporary use and before acceptance tests, all systems shall be readjusted to meet permanent operational requirements. This occupancy shall not be construed as final acceptance cost of utilities for such operation will be paid by the Owner.
C. Operation Test and Instruction:
1. After final acceptance, the Contractor shall operate all mechanical systems and provide operational instructions for a period of at least
2. three
3. Eight-hour day(s) to demonstrate fulfillment of the requirements of the contract.
During this time, all adjustments shall be made to the equipment until the entire system is in satisfactory operating condition acceptable to the Owner
4. Final Operation Instructions: Contractor shall place a competent person at the building who shall operate the systems instructing the Owner's Representatives in all details of operation and maintenance.
5. Any required instructions from manufacturer's representatives shall be given during this period.
6. All arrangements for operation and instruction periods shall be made through the Owner
D. For specific requirements see individual Mechanical Sections.
3.12 RUBBISH REMOVAL AND CLEANING:
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 00 00 - 11
Upon completion of the work under this section, the Contractor shall remove all surplus materials, equipment and debris incidental to their work, and leave the premises clean and orderly.
3.13 SERVICE:
Ninety (90) days free service shall be provided after completion of the job including changing of filters. Replacement filters shall be provided by the Owner and shall be on the job site.
3.14 PAINTING:
A. Excepting piping identification specified in the specific section all painting is specified in the Painting Section of the Specifications.
B. Surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned of cement, plaster and other spills.
C. Factory finishes shall be repaired to original condition when scratched or dented. ~~~END OF SECTION~~~
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 1
SECTION 23 30 00 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. The responsibilities of the Contractor shall include the following systems and equipment complete, and any additional work shown on the drawings or hereinafter specified.
Ducted Split System Heat Pumps
Rooftop Packaged Heat Pumps
Exhaust Fans
Ductwork
Duct and Pipe Insulation
Vibration Isolation
Automatic Temperature Control
Test and Balance
B. The Contractor shall provide all sheet metal work as shown on the drawings or as required for the mechanical systems. Sheet metal work shall be as specified in this section.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Reference to Other Sections: The applicable requirements from the following sections shall form a part of the heating, ventilating and air cond itioning work and the Contractor shall consult them in detail for general and specific requirements.
Section 23 00 00 General Requirements Mechanical
22 00 00 Plumbing
23 09 23 Fire Protection
23 09 80 Mechanical Commissioning
1.3 RELATED WORK:
A. The following work will not be furnished under this section of the specifications but will be furnished by other trades.
1. Power voltage wiring and connections thereto and all power voltage conduit.
2. Openings in walls, floor, roofs.
3. Louvers in doors and building walls.
4. Concrete work.
5. Cutting, patching and furring.
6. Flashing.
7. Final painting.
8. Equipment foundation pads and platforms.
9. Gas and condensate piping.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Submit for approval, in accordance with Section 23 05 00, Contractor shall provide in electronic, Port able Document Format (PDF) fully dimensioned shop drawings for all specified equipment, controls and ductwork construction details. Manufacturer’s equipment drawings are to be complete with capacity and sound level ratings as indicated in the drawings or s pecifications. Contractor shall also submit all manufacturer’s internal wiring diagrams for electrical equipment and shall prepare other
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 2
wiring diagrams showing the interlocking of the various controls and safety devices of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems. Submit performance curves for all fans (except propeller types and rooftop type) and for all water pumps 1 HP and larger.
Equipment capacity tables requiring interpolation or extrapolation are not acceptable.
B. Submit for approval, installation drawings which show exact dimensions and locations of openings required in floors, roofs and walls for ducts, air intakes and exhaust, roof exhausters, piping etc.
C. For duct and piping shop drawing development, the contractor shall obtain the mos t the current architectural, structural and electrical CAD files to be overlaid on to mechanical duct and piping shop drawings.
1.5 FILTERS:
A. A complete set of filters shall be supplied for use during the construction, testing and balancing period. A complete s et of new filters shall be installed after testing and balancing.
1.6 EQUIPMENT START-UP:
A. Provide the services of manufacturer’s factory-trained service representative to start -up package rooftop units, split system heat pump, and exhaust fans Include in start -up, testing controls, demonstration of compliance with requirements, and replacement of damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES:
A. Supply ducts, return ducts, and exhaust ducts, plenum chambers, housing, panels, unless otherwise specified herein or on the drawings, shall be fabricated from zinc - coated (galvanized) steel sheets conforming to the latest ASTM specification A -653.
Zinc-coating shall be of the “Commercial” class. Where gauge numbers of metals are indicated or specified, they shall represent the manufacturer’s standard gauge numbers, prior to galvanizing.
B. Exposed Ductwork: All exposed ductwork shall be free from dings and dents. All rectangular and round ductwork shall have Ductmate System conn ections. All exposed round ducts shall be spiral type duct and shall be installed so seams line up at connections to appear as a single duct run. All exposed ductwork shall be supported using threaded rods. Sheet metal straps are not acceptable. All expose d duct fittings (i.e., elbows, branch tees, etc.) shall be two gages heavier than the duct they are connected to.
C. Kitchen Ventilation Systems: Ducts and plenums serving Type 1 hoods shall be constructed of not less than No. 16 manufacturers standard gage s teel for ducts 4 square-feet and less cross section area, and No. 14 gauge for ducts over 4 square -feet cross section area.
D. Dishwashing machine exhaust ductwork shall be No. 304 stainless steel, minimum of No. 18 gauge, all welded. Flanged joints where nec essary shall be sealed with Dow - Corning building sealant No. 780, or equal.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 3
E. Volume Dampers:
1. Damper blades shall be manufactured of 16-gauge sheet metal.
2. Rectangular dampers shall be opposed blade type. Frame shall be 16 -gauge galvanized steel. Where dimen sions of duct exceed 18” x 12”, blades shall not be over 8” wide. Bearings shall be provided; holes punched in ductwork to serve as bearings will not be accepted. Locking quadrant sizes shall be as follows: Up to 40 square-inches shall be 1/41 quadrant; up to 18” x 12” shall be %” quadrant, and over 18” x 12” shall be 1/2,, quadrant.
3. Round dampers up to 9 -inch diameter may be installed in sheet metal spin fittings when used for balancing air distribution devices. Frames for dampers 10 -inch diameter and abov e shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel. Dampers above 20 -inch diameter shall be reinforced. Quadrant sizes shall be as follows: up to 9 -inch diameter shall be 1/4-inch quadrant, 10-inch through 20-inch diameter shall be 3/8- inch quadrant, and over 20-inch diameter shall be 1/2-inch quadrant.
F. Access Doors:
1. Duct access doors to all fire dampers shall be insulated type as manufactured by Duro Dyne, Pottorf, Karp or equal. Doors shall be 24-gauge, metal, 24 gauge frame, insulation shall be 1-inch fiberglass, covered with 28 gauge metal, with loose pin hinges, and cam -lock latches. Door frame shall contain foam gasket, and a sponge rubber gasket shall be attached to back of each door frame to ensure tight seal between duct and frame. Finish shall be factory applied . Service shall be stenciled on door, e.g., “Fire Damper” in 1/2 -inch letters. Size shall be 16” x 12” where space and duct size permit. On small ducts and in restricted space, 12 -inch by 10-inch may be used.
2. Access doors installed in round ductwork shall be rolled plate and shall be at least 2 gauges thicker than the gauge required for the duct. Doors shall be close -fitting with foam strip gasket and a minimum of 2 quick fastening latches. Doors for ducts up to 12 -inches diameter shall be provided with 2 h inges and for ducts above 12 - inches diameter provide one continuous hinge.
G. Fire Dampers Assemblies: Furnish and install all fire damper assemblies as required by the NFPA Pamphlet 90A and local authorities having jurisdiction. The dampers shall be approved and listed by the State of California Fire Marshal. Dampers shall be Style B curtain type complete with fusible link with 160 degree rating. Manufacturer shall be Pottorff, Ruskin, or Greenheck.
H. Fire/Smoke Assemblies: Furnish and install all fire and smo ke damper assemblies as required by the NFPA pamphlet 90A and local authorities having jurisdiction. Dampers shall be complete with damper actuator activated by duct mounted smoke detector or firestat. (Projects with central fire control panel shall have d ampers provided with two damper position switches linked to damper blade.) The damper assembly, including actuator, shall be approved and listed by the State of California Fire Marshal.
Manufacturer shall be Pottorff, Ruskin, or Greenheck.
I. Flexible Connectors: Furnish and install connections at the point where ductwork casing connects to fans, and where shown on the drawings. Connectors shall be manufactured by Duro Dyne. Indoor flexible connectors shall be Neoprene #1 0003 MFN metal fab.
Outdoor flexible connectors shall be Durolon #10002 MFD metal fab. Connectors shall be securely clamped to ductwork, fans and apparatus by means of bolted metal straps.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 4
J. Flexible Ducts:
1. Flexible ducts shall consist of an exterior reinforced laminated vapor barrier, fiberglass insulation, encapsulated spring steel wire Helix and impervious smooth, non-perforated interior vinyl liner. Individual lengths of flexible ducts shall contain factory fabricated steel connection collars.
2. Flexible ductwork located within the insulate d building envelope shall have a minimum insulating value of R -4.2, 1-1/4-inch, 0.76 lb. minimum density fiberglass blanket. Flexible ductwork located within or outside of the building but outside of the insulated building envelope shall have a minimum ins ulating value of R -8.0, 2-1/4- inch, 0.76 lb. minimum density fiberglass blanket.
3. Flexible ducts shall be supported at or near mid-length with 2” wide, 28 gauge steel collar attached to the structure with an approved duct hanger. Installation shall minimize sharp radius turns or offsets. The maximum length shall be 5 feet and can be used at the terminal ends only, except that flexible ducts may be used to cross seismic joints without offsets.
4. Insulated low pressure flexible duct shall be Thermaflex type M -KE or approved equal.
2.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES:
(Systems 7.5-Tons or less)
A. Line Sets shall be Copper Tube UL Recognized to 700 PSI. R410A Engineered and Tested.
B. Insulation shall Meet ASTM B1003,ASTM C -534 & ASTM E -84 Fire & Smoke Rating.
Closed cell elastomeric foam Resists mold & mildew UV retardant added to minimize ultraviolet degradation
C. All Split system air conditioning equipment shall have refrigerant lines sized and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations fo r each system application. Installation shall include all devices, accessories, and Means/methods of installation that may be recommended.
(Systems 8-Tons and larger)
D. A. Refrigerant piping shall be seamless copper tubing, hard drawn, type K or L, conforming to ASTM B88.
E. Fittings for copper tubing shall be wrought copper or bronze solder joint fittings conforming to ANSI B16 22.
F. Moisture and liquid indicators shall be Sporlan See -All or equal for sweat joints.
Refrigerant piping 2” and small shall have full line size indicators, and piping over 2” shall have the indicators mounted in “O.D.” bypass as recommended by manufacturer.
G. Driers shall be Henry, Superior, or equal angle cartridge flanged type with solder
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 5
connection and required drier cartridges for each unit.
H. Strainer for refrigerant piping shall be Henry, Superior or equal angle or “Y” pattern with 100 mesh Monel screen reinforced with 10 mesh brass screen or equal.
I. Valves 1⅜” O.D. and above shall be Henry, Superior, or equal, bronze alloy.
J. Valves 1⅛” O.D. and below shall be Henry, Superior, or equal, packless shut-off type.
K. Solenoid valves shall be Sporlan or equal for sweat or screw joint connections as required. Co il housing shall have conduit connection. Valve shall be Underwriters’ Laboratories and CSA approved.
L. Expansion valves shall be Sporlan or equal thermostatic type with removable power element, external equalizer connection, external adjustable super heat a nd remote bulb.
Valve capacity shall be equivalent to or slightly exceed the tonnage of the system. Valve selection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer of the condensing equipment.
2.3 CONDENSATE PIPING:
A. All condensate drain piping and gas piping will be furnished and installed by Plumbing Contractor. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate location and size of pipe connections with Plumbing Contractor.
2.4 INSULATION:
A. Install thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces after testing, inspection, and approval in strict accordance with these specifications, applicable drawings and contract documents and manufacturers’ recommendations. Except for materials listed below, all insulation and accessory materials are to meet NFPA requirement of flame spread not to ex ceed 25 and smoke developed not to exceed 50 as tested by Procedure ASTM -E-84, NFPA 225, or UL 723.
1. Excepted are:
a. Flexible, closed cell, foamed plastic insulation (Armacell or approved equal) on water chilling units, copper tubing refrigerant piping, coppe r tubing runouts and drain lines only.
B. Duct Insulation: Insulate all concealed supply and return air ducts with flexible glass fiber insulation with factory applied reinforced foil kraft facing, Manville R -series Microlite FSKL or approved equal. 1½” minimum thickness, density 2.0 pcf. Installed “R” value of
4.2 in conditioned space and 8.0. in non-conditioned space.
C. Rectangular supply and return air ductwork exposed to weather shall be furnished with interior lining. Lining shall comply with the latest U L and NFPA standards protection against fire and smoke. Liner shall be 2” thick, density 3.0 pcf, similar to CertainTeed Tough Gard. Installed “R” valve to be 8.0.
D. Refrigeration suction piping shall be insulated with ¾” thick “Armacell” by Manville or approved equal. Exterior pipe insulation shall be protected with aluminum jacketing.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 6
2.5 EQUIPMENT:
A. Ducted Split System Heat Pumps:
1. Condensing Unit
B. General:
Factory assembled, single -piece, air -cooled condensing unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressors, nitrogen holding charge, and special features required prior to field start-up.
C. Unit Cabinet:
1. Cabinet shall be galvanized steel casing with a baked enamel powder or pre -painted finish.
2. Control box access panels shall be hinged for service access.
D. Fans:
1. Condenser fans shall be direct-drive propeller type, discharging air vertically upward.
2. All condenser fan motors shall be totally enclosed 3 -phase type with permanently lubricated ball bearings, c lass F insulation and internal, automatic -reset thermal overload protection or manual reset calibrated circuit breakers.
3. Shafts shall have inherent corrosion resistance.
4. Fan blades shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
5. Condenser-fan openings shall be equipped with PVC-coated steel wire safety guards.
E. Compressors:
1. Compressors shall be rotary scroll.
2. Operating oil charge and a crankcase heater control oil dilution.
3. Compressors shall be mounted on two rails having rubber in shear vibration isolators.
4. Staging of compressors shall provide unloading capability. Digital compressor unloading control shall be available as an option on one circuit (not available on size 065 unit).
5. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings and shall have either internal line break thermal and current overload protection or external current overload modules with compressor temperature sensors.
F. Condenser Coils:
1. Coil shall be air -cooled microchannel heat exchanger (MCHX) and shall have a series of flat tubes containing a series of multiple, parallel flow microchannels layered between the refrigerant manifolds. Microchannel coils shall consist of a two -pass arrangement. Coil construction shall consist of aluminum alloys for the fins, tubes and manifolds in combination with a corrosion-resistant coating on the tubes.
2. Tubes shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed.
3. Assembled condenser coils shall be leak tested and pressure tested at 650 psig (4482 kPa).
4. To plan the unit installation an d for ease of maintenance/coil removal on unit sizes 38AP065-130, all refrigerant piping entering and leaving the condenser coils shall be located on only one side of the condensing unit so the coils can be removed (when needed) from the side free of pipin g. This is important to consider because removing
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 7
the coils from the header side, although possible, involves extra labor due to extra bending and brazing of the coil headers.
G. Refrigeration Components:
1. Refrigeration circuit components shall include liq uid line temperature relief device, pressure transducers, liquid line shutoff valve, suction shutoff valve, suction line accumulators, nitrogen holding charge, and compressor oil.
2. Units shall include one factory -installed suction line accumulator for each refrigerant circuit.
H. Controls and Safeties:
1. Minimum unit safety devices shall include:
Solid-state compressor lockout to provide optional reset capability at the space thermostat if any of the following safety devices trip and shut off compressor. a. Compressor lockout protection for internal or external overload. b. Low pressure protection.
c. High pressure protection (high pressure switch or internal). d. Compressor reverse rotation protection.
e. Loss of charge protection.
f. Low suction superheat protection.
g. Short cycle protection.
h. Suction and discharge pressure transducers.
i. Circuit breakers or fuses for short circuit protection of compressors.
I. Electrical Requirements:
All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location (115 and 130 size units available with dual point power with terminal block).
J. Special Features:
1. Low Ambient Control:
a. Control shall regulate the fan motor speed in response to the saturated condensing temperature of the unit. The control shall be capable of operating with outdoor temperatures at –20°F (–28.9°C).
b. Motormaster® low ambient control shall be available as a factory -installed option or fieldinstalled accessory for all units.
2. Optional Condenser Coil Materials:
a. E-coated microchannel coils:
E-coated aluminum microchannel coil shal l have a flexible epoxy polymer coating uniformly applied to all coil external surface areas without material bridging between fins or louvers. Coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation, including all exposed fin edges. E -coat shall have a t hickness of 0.8 to 1.2 mil with top coat having a uniform dry film thickness from 1.0 to 2.0 mil on all external coil surface areas including fin edges. E -coated coils shall have superior hardness characteristics of 2H per ASTM D3363 -00 and cross hatch adh esion of 4B -5B per ASTM D3359-02. Impact resistance shall be up to 160 in./lb (ASTM D2794 -93). E- coated coil shall have superior impact resistance with no cracking, chipping, or peeling per NSF/ANSI 51 -2002 Method 10.2. E -coated aluminum microchannel coils shall be capable of withstanding 8,000 -hour salt spray test in accordance with the ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) B-117 Standard.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 8
b. Pre-coated aluminum-fin coils:
Coil shall have a durable epoxy -phenolic coating to provide protection in m ildly corrosive coastal environments. Coating shall be applied to the aluminum fin stock prior to the fin stamping process to create an inert barrier between the aluminum fin and copper tube. Epoxy -phenolic barrier shall minimize galvanic action between dissimilar metals.
3. Non-Fused Disconnect:
a. non-fused disconnect is available as a factory -installed option for all units having single point power connection units.
4. Seismic Certification:
a. seismic unit modification is provided which will result in a unit SDS (seismic design acceleration parameter) level of 2.5 for 38AP025 -065 units and 2.1 for 38AP070 -130 units.
5. Air Handling Unit
K. Unit shall be factory-supplied, central station air handler. The air-handling unit may consist of a fan with the following factory-installed components as indicated on the equipment schedule.
1. Mixing Box Section:
a. No filter tracks.
b. With flat filter tracks.
c. With angle filter tracks.
d. With bag cartridge filter tracks.
e. With exhaust air dampers.
2. Air Mixing Section.
3. Exhaust Box Section.
4. Internal Face and Bypass Damper Section.
5. Plenum Section:
a. No drain pan.
6. Filter Section:
a. 4-in. flat filters.
7. Coil Section:
a. Direct expansion coil.
L. Fan Section:
1. Horizontal draw-thru (supply, return, and exhaust).
2. Vertical draw-thru.
2.7 CASING
A. Construction:
1. Unit shall be constructed of a complete frame with easily removable panels. Removal of any panel shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit.
2. All units shall be supplied with 14 -gage or heavier, G -90 galvanized steel base rails.
Bolt-on legs are NOT acceptable. Perimeter lifting lugs for overhead lifting shall be provided on each shipping section. Slinging units in place of lifting lugs shall not be acceptable.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 9
3. Unit shall be thermally broken to minimize the conduction path from the inside of the casing to the outside.
4. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be constructed of galvanized steel (18 gauge optional), and shall have one of the following exterior finishes as specified:
a. Pre-painted with a baked enamel finish passing 500 -hour salt spr ay test (ASTM [American Society of Mechanical Engineers] B -117) for pre-painted steel and 125- hour marine level 1 prohesion test (ASTM G-85.A5) for pre-painted steel. b. Unpainted G-90 galvanized steel.
5. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be construc ted of galvanized steel (18 gauge optional) or stainless steel, and shall have one of the following interior finishes as specified:
a. G-90 pre -coated galvanized steel with a silver zeolite antimicrobial material registered by the US EPA (Environmental Protec tion Agency) for use in HVAC applications.
b. Unpainted G-90 galvanized steel.
c. Unpainted 304 stainless steel.
d. Option for aluminum diamond treadplate floors.
6. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be one piece, double -wall construction with foam insulati on sealed between the inner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R-value of less than 13.
7. Casing deflection shall not exceed a L/240 ratio when subject to an internal pressure of ± 8-in. wg and shall exhibit no permanent deformation at ± 9-in. wg. L is defined as the longest linear panel or cabinet length (measured to AHRI 1350 Cd level 2).
8. Casing leakage rate shall be less than 1% at 8 in. wg of nominal unit airflow or 50 cfm, whichever is greater. Leakage rate shall be tested and documen ted on a routine basis on random production units. Optionally, factory witness leak testing and/or test reports shall be available.
9. Side panels shall be easily removable for access to unit and shall seal against a full perimeter automotive style gasket to ensure a tight seal.
10. The panel retention system shall comply with UL 1995 which states all moving parts (for example, fan blades, blower wheels, pulleys, and belts) that, if accidentally contacted, could cause bodily injury, shall be guarded against accidental contact by an enclosure requiring tools for removal.
11. Accessibility options shall be as follows:
a. Hinged, lockable double -wall access door on either side with removable access panel(s) on the other side.
b. Hinged, lockable double-wall access doors on both sides. c. Removable double-wall access panels on both sides.
12. Depending on the options selected and the remaining available space inside each section, the following options may be available:
a. Reinforced glass viewports shall be factory -installed on the access panel(s) or door(s) of the section.
b. Marine lights shall be factory installed with or without GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter) convenience outlets.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 10
13. Fan supports, structural members, panels, or flooring shall not be welded, unless aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion -resistant material is used. Painted welds on unit exterior steel or galvanized steel are not acceptable.
14. All coil sections shall be doublewall construction with foam insulation sealed between the inner and outer panels. Panel asse mblies shall not carry an R -value of less than
13. Single height coil sections shall have removable frame sections to facilitate vertical coil extraction.
15. Blow-thru sections shall have a diffuser plate as an integral part of the fan section.
B. Access Doors:
Access doors shall be one piece, hinged, lockable double -wall construction with foam insulation sealed between the inner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R-value of less than 13.
C. Drain Pans:
Drain pans shall be foam insulated double -wall galvanized or stainless steel construction (18 gauge optional). The pan shall be sloped toward the drain connection. Drain pan shall have 11/2-in. MPT connection exiting through the hand side or opposite side of the casing as specified. One drain outle t shall be supplied for each cooling coil section. Drain pan shall allow no standing water and comply with ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers). Standard 62.1-2010. Where 2 or more coils are stacked in a coil b ank, intermediate drain pans shall be provided and the condensate shall be piped to the bottom drain pan. The bottom coil shall not serve as a drain path for the upper coil.
2.8 FANS
A. General:
1. Forward-curved fan sections shall have one double -width double -inlet (DWDI) fan wheel and scroll. They shall be constructed of galvanized steel with baked enamel.
They shall be designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fans shall have an AMCA class rating corresponding to the st atic pressure at which the fan is designed to operate (Class I or II). Completed fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced in accordance with AHRI Guideline G and ANSI S2.19 at design operating speed using contract drive and motor if ordered.
2. Airfoil fan sections shall have one DWDI airfoil fan wheel and scroll. Airfoil blades shall be double thickness design constructed of heavy gage, high strength steel or aluminum continuously welded to the backplate and the spun inlet flange. Entire fan assembly shall be cleaned, primed and painted with alkyd enamel, except for an aluminum fan wheel when supplied. Fans shall have an AMCA class rating corresponding to the static pressure at which the fan is designed to operate (Class I or II). Completed fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced to minimum grade of G 6.3 per ANSI/AMCA 204 at design operating speed using contract drive and motor if ordered.
3. Belt drive plenum fan sections shall have one single-width single-inlet (SWSI) airfoil fan wheel. Airfoil blades shall be double thickness design constructed of heavy gage, high strength steel or aluminum continuously welded to the backplate and the spun inlet flange. Entire fan assembly shall be cleaned, primed and painted with alkyd enamel, except for an aluminum fan w heel when supplied. They shall be designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fans shall have an AMCA class rating corresponding to the static pressure at which the fan is designed to operate (Class I or II). Comp leted fan assembly shall be dynamically
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 11
balanced to minimum grade of G 6.3 per ANSI/AMCA 204 at design operating speed using contract drive and motor if ordered.
4. Direct drive plenum fan sections:
a. with a NEMA “T” frame motor shall have the option of one, t wo, four, or six single width single inlet (SWSI) airfoil fan wheel(s). Airfoil blades shall be double thickness design continuously welded to the back plate and the front plate. Fan wheel shall be constructed of aluminum. Airfoil blades shall be aluminum extrusions and shall be top welded to the back plate and front plate of the wheel.
Fan wheel shall be dynamically balanced per ISO standard 1940 quality grade G6.3.
b. with an EC motor shall have the option of single or multiple SWSI backward curved fans. Fan wheel shall be constructed of aluminum. Blades shall be welded to both front and back plates of the wheel. Fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced per ISO standard 1940 quality grade 6.3.
5. Isolated fan assembly vibration shall not exceed 0.248 in. per s econd when mounted on active isolators. Vibration shall be measured in both vertical and horizontal directions at the specified fan operating speed using specified motor. For testing purposes, accelerometers shall be mounted on the motor near the bearing l ocations an removed before shipment.
6. All fan sled components shall provide corrosion protection to pass 100 -hour salt spray test per ASTM B-117.
7. Fan wheels for all AF, FC, belt drive PF, and direct drive PF with NEMA “T” frame motors shall be keyed to the shaft. Fan wheels for direct drive PF with EC motors shall be mounted directly to the rotor of the EC motor. All shall be designed for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheels and shafts shall be selected with a maximum operating speed 25% below the first critical.
8. Belt drive fan motor shall be mounted within the fan section casing on slide rails equipped with adjusting screws. Belt drive and direct drive with NEMA “T” frame motors shall be premium efficiency, open dr ip-proof or totally enclosed fan cooled NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) Design A or B with size and electrical characteristics as shown on the equipment schedule. Motor shall be mounted on a horizontal flat surface and shall not be sup ported by the fan or its structural members. All three -phase motors shall have a ± 10% voltage utilization range and a
1.15 minimum service factor. Motor shall be compliant with the Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA) of 2007 where applicable. Sing le-phase motors shall be available up to and including 5 hp.
9. Direct drive with EC motors shall exceed the minimum efficiency requirements of the ErP Directive for Fans, efficiency class IE4, and specify motor protection according to EN 60529. Motors shall also provide the following: locked rotor protection, phase failure detection, soft start, mains under-voltage detection, over-temperature protection of electronics/motor, and short circuit protection.
B. Performance Ratings:
Supply fan performance shall be ra ted and certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 430, latest edition.
C. Sound Ratings:
Manufacturer shall submit first through eighth octave sound power for fan discharge and casing radiated sound. Sound ratings shall be tested in accordance with AHRI 260.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 12
2.9 COILS
A. All water, steam and direct expansion (DX) refrigerant coils shall be provided to meet the scheduled performance. All coil performance shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410. All water and direct expansion coils shall be tested at 450 psig air pressure.
Direct expansion coils shall be designed and tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (latest edition). Factory -supplied 1/2-in. OD coils shall be covered under the standard product one -year l imited warranty. All steam coils, integral face and bypass coils and 5/8-in. OD coils shall be warranted for a period not in excess of 12 months from their shipment from the manufacturer. Coil epoxy coating shall be covered under a 5 -year limited warranty from the date of shipment from the manufacturer.
B. General Fabrication:
1. All water and refrigerant coils shall have minimum 1/2-in. OD copper tubes mechanically expanded into fins to ensure high thermal performance with lower total flow and pumping requirements. Minimum tube wall thickness shall be 0.016 inches. Optional tube wall thickness of 0.025 in. shall be supplied, if specified.
2. Aluminum plate fin type with belled collars. Optional copper plate fins shall be supplied, if specified. Fin type shall be sine wave construction.
3. Aluminum-finned coils shall be supplied with die -formed casing and tube sheets of mill galvanized steel or stainless steel as specified. Copper -finned coils shall be supplied with stainless steel casing and tube sheets.
C. Refrigerant Coils:
1. Headers shall be constructed of copper with brazed joints.
2. Brass refrigerant distributors and seamless copper distribution tubes shall be factory supplied to ensure uniform flow.
3. Thermal expansion valves (TXV) and nozzles shall be factory installed and piped to the exterior of the casing. Equalizer lines shall be piped internal to the coil header.
4. Suction and liquid line pairs shall be located next to each other for easy circuit identification. A custom label showing TXV size, nozzle size and conden sing unit circuit pairing shall be located on the side of the coil section.
5. Standard circuiting selections include:
a. Single distributor arrangement for sizes 03-17.
b. Row split intertwined multiple distributor arrangement for sizes 03-110. c. Face split multiple distributor arrangement for sizes 03-110.
6. Submittals must include a DX coil and condensing unit cross plot to show that the coil and condensing unit capacity match at the rated design conditions.
2.10 FILTER SECTIONS
A. Flat filter sections shall accept either 2-in. or 4-in. filters. Sections shall include side access slide rails. Optional 6-in. filter racks shall be capable of accepting 4-in. final filters. Optional 2 in. pre-filter shall be available.
B. Angle filter sections shall accept either 2 -in. or 4-in. filters of standard sizes, arranged in a horizontal V formation.
C. Differential Pressure Gages:
1. Housing shall be constructed of a glass filled nylon case and acrylic lens. Exterior finish shall be coated black.
2. Accuracy shall be ±5% of full scale throughout range at 70°F.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 13
3. Pressure limits shall be 30 psig continuous to either pressure connection.
4. Temperature limits shall be 20 to 120°F.
5. Diameter of dial face shall be 2.33 in.
6. Process connections shall be barbed, 3/16-in. for ID tubing.
2.11 DAMPERS
A. Factory-supplied dampers shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 12 months after being installed or placed in service, but in no instance shall the period of warranty be longer than 18 months from the date of the original shipment by the manufacturer.
B. Mixing boxes, filter -mixing boxes, and exhaust boxes shall have parallel or opposed blades and interconnecting outside -air and return -air dampers. Bottom damper locations shall be optionally available with a tool screen to pre vent most objects from falling through a bottom damper opening.
1. Standard Dampers:
Damper blades shall be constructed of galvanized steel, with blade seals and stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall be mechanically fastened to axle rods rotating in self - lubricating synthetic bearings. Maximum leakage rate shall be 4 cfm/ft 2 at 1 in. wg differential pressure.
2. Premium Dampers:
Damper blades shall be constructed of galvanized steel with a double -skin airfoil design, with blade seals and stainless steel jamb s eals. Blades shall be mechanically fastened to axle rods rotating in self -lubricating synthetic bearings. Maximum leakage rate shall be 2 cfm/ft2 at 1 in. wg differential pressure.
3. Outside Air Measurement Dampers:
a. Damper frame shall be nominal 4 in. x 1 in . x minimum 0.081 in. and constructed of 6063-T5 extruded aluminum.
b. Airflow measuring blades shall be airfoil -shaped, heavy gage anodized 6063 -T5 extruded aluminum and fixed in 10 in. x minimum 16 gage galvanized steel frame. c. Jamb seals shall be flexible metal compression type along control damper sides. d. Blade seals shall be neoprene along control damper blade edges. e. Bearings shall be molded synthetic.
f. Linkage shall be galvanized steel, concealed in frame. g. Axles shall be minimum 1/2-in. diameter plated stee l, hex -shaped, mechanically attached to blade.
h. Operating temperature shall be–22 to 140°F.
i. Air straightener section shall be aluminum alloy honeycomb contained in 5 in. long, 16 gage galvanized steel sleeve attached to monitoring blade frame. j. Airflow range shall be 400 to 5,000 ft per minute face velocity. k. Maximum leakage rate shall be 2 cfm/ft2 at 1 in. wg differential pressure.
C. Integral Face and Bypass Dampers:
1. Integral face and bypass (IFB) coils shall be capable of maintaining a constant air volume, within 5%, shall be capable of maintaining a constant leaving air temperature as entering air conditions vary, and shall be capable of producing mixed leaving air temperatures within 3 ft downstream with a maximum variance in air temperature of 5°F, regardless of damper position.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 14
2. When no heating is required, dampers shall divert air to bypass around heating surface with minimal temperature override.
3. Coil casing, dampers and baffles shall be fabricated from galvanized steel with an option for stainless steel. Coils shall be tested at 300 psig.
4. Integral face and bypass coils shall be provided with a connection point for field - mounted actuator(s), electrical or pneumatic, or can be provided from the factory at an additional cost.
5. Actuator connection point shall b e mechanically attached to dampers via linkage mechanisms. Dampers shall be interconnected for operation simultaneously across each face of coil.
D. Face and Bypass Dampers:
1. Internal Face and Bypass Dampers:
Internal face and bypass dampers shall be factory m ounted in galvanized steel frame.
Damper blades shall be constructed of galvanized steel, with high temperature blade and edge seals. Blades shall be mechanically fastened to axle rods rotating in self - lubricating synthetic bearings. To eliminate blade war ping, face dampers shall be sectionalized to limit blade length to 60 in. maximum. Face damper blades shall be opposed and arranged to match coil face with top bypass, and internal linkage.
2.12 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES:
A. ECM Power Distribution Panel
1. Power distrib ution panel shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4 electrical box and shall be included with every fan section which has an ECM fan array.
2. A single line of sight disconnect for the entire fan array shall be located on the outside of the electrical box.
3. Individual circuit breakers for each fan shall be mounted on the power distribution panel to isolate each fan for service. Fans shall be factory wired back to the power distribution panel.
4. Control wiring from all fans in the array shall terminate at one point insi de the power distribution panel to control the entire array. Control signal shall be wired as 0 -10 volt and shall include a field installed resistor if 4-20 mA control is required.
5. BACnet or Modbus shall be available as an option. When selected, all motor s shall be factory addressed.
B. Single Point Power:
The single point power (SPP) box shall have an externally mounted, complete unit line of site disconnect. Internally, the single point power box shall have individual circuit breakers for each circuit, allo wing individual circuit protection and a means of disconnect while not completely disabling the unit. SPP box locations shall be offered as:
a. Single Point Power Right Side Mount
b. Single Point Power Left Side Mount
c. Single point Power End Mount
1. Single Point Power Enclosure:
a. Enclosure supplied shall have appropriately sized circuit breakers, fusing, wiring, labeling and penetrations based on the unit configuration. b. Enclosure shall be equipped with a lockable door and a NEMA extended rotary handle mechanism on t he enclosure door to provide a means for external disconnect operation to the main circuit breaker switch within the SPP enclosure.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 15
c. Enclosure to be SCE “Enviroline” NEMA 4 steel or equivalent. d. Enclosure to be suitable for both indoor and outdoor applicatio ns and shall operate within temperature limits of–20°F to +140°F.
e. All SPP assemblies shall comply with UL 508 and be labeled as compliant. f. Wiring penetrations shall be pre-punched in the back of the enclosure and enter the inside of the air handling unit through strain reliefs. Enclosure shall be gasketed and sealed to the panel it is mounted to.
g. A single 120 volt GFCI outlet shall be mounted on the enclosure when at least one marine light, convenience outlet, UV-C section or controls section is selected. h. Internal components (i.e., Fuse blocks, circuit breakers) shall be labeled with the appropriate circuit identification.
i. Enclosure assemblies supplied with fuses shall have a label affixed that provides replacement fuse identification.
j. All enclosures shall have the following labels adhered to the inside of the enclosure door: UL 508 labeling, amperage and voltage rating, maximum overcurrent protection rating.
2. Transformer:
a. Single phase resin filled.
b. Low voltage transformer to be Square D or equivalent. c. NEMA 3R enclosure rating.
d. Stepdown shall be one of the following:
1) 240/480 volt primary to 120/240 volt secondary 60 Hz 2) 600 volt primary to 120/240 volt secondary 60 Hz
3) 190/200/208/220 or 380/400/416/440 volt primary to 110/220 volt secondary 50/60 Hz.
3. Wiring and Harnesses:
a. Wiring harnesses shall be specifically designed for the unit configuration. Generic wiring harnesses are not acceptable.
b. Wire assemblies shall be thermoplastic heat resistant nylon coated (THHN) stranded copper (90°C) or AWM wire. All wires u sed shall be moisture resistant.
Conductors shall be bundled and sleeved with heat -shrink material over connector end and sleeve. All colored electrical tape for wire marking shall be “3M Super 35 electrical tape”. For readability, laser print to be black on white background, smudge and wear resistant for life of wire assembly. The crimping of contactors to wires and the assembly of connectors to contactors shall follow manufacturer’s instructions.
c. Wiring harnesses shall have polarized plugs that can only b e assembled one way.
Plugs shall have the ground lug identified by a green connector, while all of the powered lugs shall be black.
d. If a shipping split is inserted in the unit configuration, a label shall instruct the assembler to connect the single point wiring harness before the two unit sections are mated. Each wiring harness shall extend at least 12 in. from each shipping split to allow the harnesses to be mated.
C. Marine Lights and Convenience Outlets:
1. Cast, non-ferrous metal, weatherproof, fixture.
2. Cast, non-ferrous metal, weatherproof, electrical junction box.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 16
3. Gasketed, heat and shock resistant glass globe protects against moisture and debris.
4. Cast, non-ferrous metal lamp guard to protect glass globe.
5. UL and CSA listed.
6. 100 watt type ‘A’ lamp maximum capacity.
7. Each fixture is equipped with a 9.5 watt, 120 volt 800 lumen LED lamp with an average rated life of 25,000 hours, factory installed.
8. Metallic, single gang, electrical junction box, UL listed.
9. With convenience outlet: Factory supplied and wired, SPST, toggle switch and 15 amp, 120 vac/60 Hz, NEMA 5 -15 type, ground fault circuit interrupt (GFCI) receptacle, UL listed.
10. Without convenience outlet: Factory supplied and wired, SPST, UL listed toggle switch.
11. Each fixture is factory wired to an externally m ounted switch box. (Field power connections are made to the switch box mounted externally on the unit.)
12. All factory wiring penetrating through the panel is protected in ‘RIGID’ type metal conduit.
D. Disconnects:
Factory-supplied disconnects shall be covered under a 1 year limited warranty from the manufacturer from the date of shipment.
1. 200-230 volt/3 -phase fused and non -fused disconnects shall have the following characteristics:
a. Visible blades.
b. Quick-make, quick-break operating mechanism.
c. Cover padlock hasp and handle lock “OFF.”
d. 240 vac maximum.
e. Factory supplied and installed class RK5 fuses (fused disconnects only). f. Up to 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes SCCR, utilizing appropriately rated, factory-supplied Class R fuses.
g. Horsepower rated for motor applications.
h. Tangential combination knockouts for field wiring.
i. Spring reinforced plated copper fuse clips.
j. NEMA type 1 enclosures.
k. Insulated, bondable solid neutral assemblies.
l. UL listed, File E2875.
m. Meet or exceed NEMA KS1-1990.
E. Package Heat Pump:
1. General:
a. Outdoor, rooftop mounted, electrically controlled, heating and cooling unit utilizing a(n) hermetic scroll compressor(s) for cooling duty and heat pump for heating duty. b. Factory assembled, single piece heating and cooling rooftop unit. Contained within th e unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, and special features required prior to field start-up.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 17
c. Unit shall use Puron® refrigerant.
d. Unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. e. Unit must be selected and installed in compliance with local, state, and federal codes.
2. Quality Assurance:
a. Unit meets ASHRAE 90.1-2016 and IECC-2015 minimum efficiency requirements. b. Unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standards 340/360. c. Unit shall be designed to conform to ASHRAE 15.
d. Unit shall be ETL -tested and certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47 Standards and ETL-listed and certified under Canadian standards as a total package for safety requirements.
e. Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for fla me spread and smoke generation.
f. Unit internal insulation linings shall be resistant to mold growth in accordance with “mold growth and humidity” test in ASTM C1338, G21, and UL 181 or comparable test method. Air stream surfaces shall be evaluated in accord ance with the “Erosion Test” in UL 181, as part of ASTM C1071.
g. Unit casing shall be capable of withstanding 500 hour salt spray exposure per ASTM B117 (scribed specimen).
h. Roof curb shall be designed to conform to NRCA Standards. i. Unit shall be subjected to a completely automated run test on the assembly line. The data for each unit will be stored at the factory, and must be available upon request. j. Unit shall be designed in accordance with UL Standard 1995, ETL listed including tested to withstand rain.
k. Unit shall be constructed to prevent intrusion of snow and tested to prevent snow intrusion into the control box up to 40 mph.
l. Unit shake tested to assurance level 1, ASTM D4169 to ensure shipping reliability. m. High Efficiency Motors listed shall meet section 31 3 of the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (EISA 2007).
3. Operating Characteristics:
a. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 115°F (46°C) ambient outdoor temperature, meeting maximum load criteria of AHRI Standard 340/360 at ±10% voltage.
b. Compressor with standard controls shall be capable of operation from 25°F ( –4°C), ambient outdoor temperatures. Accessory winter start kit is necessary if mechanically cooling at ambient temperatures below 25°F (–4°C).
c. Unit shall be capable of simultan eous heating duty and defrost cycle operation when using accessory electric heaters.
d. Unit shall discharge supply air vertically or horizontally as shown on contract drawings. e. Unit shall be factory configured for vertical supply and return configurations. f. Unit shall be field convertible from vertical to horizontal configuration. g. Unit shall be capable of mixed operation: vertical supply with horizontal return or horizontal supply with vertical return.
4. ElectricalRequirements:
a. Main power supply voltage, phas e, and frequency must match those required by the manufacturer.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 18
5. Unit Cabinet:
a. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, and shall be bonderized and coated with a pre-painted baked enamel finish on all externally exposed surfaces. b. Unit cabinet exterior paint shall be: film thickness, (dry) 0.003 inches minimum, gloss (per ASTM D523, 60°F / 16°C): 60, Hardness: H-2H Pencil hardness. c. Evaporator fan compartment interior cabinet insulation shall conform to AHRI Standards 340/360 minimum exterior sweat criteria. Interior surfaces shall be insulated with a minimum 1/2-in. thick, 1 lb density, flexible fiberglass insulation, neoprene coated on the air side. Aluminum foil -faced fiberglass insulation shall be used in the heat compartment.
d. Unit internal insulation linings shall be resistant to mold growth in accordance with “mold growth and humidity” test in ASTM C1338, G21, and UL 181 or comparable test method. Air stream surfaces shall be evaluated in accordance with the “Erosion Test” in UL 181, as part of ASTM C1071.
e. Base of unit shall have a minimum of three locations for thru -the-base electrical connections (factory-installed or field-installed), standard. h. Base Rail:
1. Unit shall have base rails on a minimum of 2 sides.
2. Holes shall be provided in the base rails for rigging shackles to facilitate maneuvering and overhead rigging.
3. Holes shall be provided in the base rail for moving the rooftop by fork truck.
4. Base rail shall be a minimum of 16 gage thickness.
i. Condensate pan and connections:
1. Shall be a sloped condensate drain pan made of a non-corrosive material.
2. Shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 62.
3. Shall use a 3/4-in. -14 NPT drain connection, possible either through the bottom or end of the drain pan. Connection shall be made per manufacturer’s recommendations.
j. Top panel:
1. Shall be a single piece top panel on 07 through 09 sizes, two pieces on 12 and 14 sizes.
k. Electrical Connections:
1. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single, factory prepared, knockout location.
2. Thru-the-base capability:
1. Standard unit shall have a thru -the-base electrical location(s) using a raised, embossed portion of the unit basepan.
2. Optional, factory-approved, water-tight connection method must be used for thru- the-base electrical connections.
3. No basepan pen etration, other than those authorized by the manufacturer, is permitted.
l. Component access panels (standard):
1. Cabinet panels shall be easily removable for servicing.
2. Unit shall have one factory-installed, tool-less, removable, filter access panel.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 19
3. Panels covering control box, indoor fan, indoor fan motor, gas components (where applicable), and compressors shall have molded composite handles.
4. Handles shall be UV modified, composite, permanently attached, and recessed into the panel.
5. Screws on the vertical portion of all removable access panel shall engage into heat resistant, molded composite collars.
6. Collars shall be removable and easily replaceable using manufacturer recommended parts.
6. Coils:
a. Standard Aluminum/Copper Coils:
1. Standard evaporator and condens er coils shall have aluminum lanced plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally grooved copper tubes with all joints brazed.
2. Evaporator coils shall be leak tested to 150 psig, pressure tested to 450 psig, and qualified to UL 1995 burst test at 1775 psig.
3. Condenser coils shall be leak tested to 150 psig, pressure tested to 650 psig, and qualified to UL 1995 burst test at 1980 psig.
b. Optional pre-coated aluminum fin condenser coils:
1. Shall have a durable epoxy -phenolic coating to provide protection in mildly corrosive coastal environments.
2. Coating shall be applied to the aluminum fin stock prior to the fin stamping process to create an inert barrier between the aluminum fin and copper tube.
3. Epoxy-phenolic barrier shall minimize galvanic action between dissimilar metals.
4. Corrosion durability of fin stock shall be confirmed through testing to be no less than 1000 hours salt spray per ASTM B117-90.
5. Corrosion durability of fin stock shall be confirmed through testing to have no visible corrosion after 48 ho ur immersion in a room temperature solution of 5% salt, 1% acetic acid.
6. Fin stock coating shall pass 2000 hours of the following: one week exposure in the prohesion chamber fo llowed by one week of accelerated ultraviolet light testing.
Prohesion chamber: t he solution shall contain 3.5% sodium chloride and 0.35% ammonium sulfate. The exposure cycle is one hour of salt fog application at ambient followed by one hour drying at 95°F (35°C).
7. Refrigerant Components:
a. Refrigerant circuit shall include the following control, safety, and maintenance features:
1. Fixed orifice metering system shall prevent mal-distribution of two-phase refrigerant by including multiple fixed orifice devices in each refrigeration circuit. Each orifice is to be optimized to the coil circuit it serves.
2. Refrigerant filter drier.
3. Service gage connections on suction and discharge lines.
4. Pressure gage access through a specially designed access port in the top panel of the unit.
5. Suction line accumulator to provide protection in all operating mo des from cooling, heating and reverse cycle switching.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 20
b. There shall be gage line access port in the top of the rooftop, covered by a black, removable plug:
a. The plug shall be easy to remove and replace.
b. When the plug is removed, the gage access port shall en able maintenance personnel to route their pressure gage lines.
c. This gage access port shall facilitate correct and accurate condenser pressure readings by enabling the reading with the compressor access panel on. d. The plug shall be made of a leak proof, UV-resistant, composite material. c. Compressors:
a. Unit shall use one fully hermetic, scroll compressor for each independent refrigeration circuit.
b. Models shall be available with single compressor designs on 07 models, plus additional 2 compressor (stage) models from 08-14 sizes. c. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings.
d. Compressors shall be internally protected from high discharge temperature conditions.
e. Compressors shall be protected from an overtemperature and over -amperage conditions by an internal, motor overload device.
f. Compressor shall be factory mounted on rubber grommets. g. Compressor motors shall have internal line break thermal, current overload and high pressure differential protection.
h. Crankcase heaters shall be utilized on all models to protect compressor with specific refrigerant charge.
d. Filter Section:
1. Filters access is specified in the unit cabinet section of this specification.
2. Filters shall be held in place by a pivoting filter tray, facilitating easy rem oval and installation.
3. Shall consist of factory-installed, low velocity, throw-away 2-in. thick fiberglass filters.
4. Filters shall be standard, commercially available sizes.
5. Only one size filter per unit is allowed.
e. Evaporator Fan and Motor:
1. Evaporator fan motor:
a. Shall have permanently lubricated bearings.
b. Shall have inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection or circuit breaker.
3. Shall have a maximum continuous bhp rating for continuous duty operation; no safety factors above that rating shall be required.
2. Belt-driven Evaporator Fan:
a. Belt drive shall include an adjustable pitch motor pulley. b. Shall use sealed, permanently lubricated ball-bearing type. c. Blower fan shall be double inlet type with forward-curved blades.
4. Shall be constructed from steel with a finish that aids with corrosion resistance and dynamically balanced.
f. Condenser Fans and Motors:
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 21
1. Condenser fan motors:
a. Shall be a totally enclosed motor.
b. Shall use permanently lubricated bearings.
c. Shall have inherent thermal overload protection with an automatic reset feature. d. Shall use a shaft down design on all models.
2. Condenser Fans:
a. Shall be a direct driven propeller type fan.
b. Shall have aluminum blades riveted to steel spiders that have corrosion resistant properties and shall be dynamically balanced.
g. Special Features, Options and Accessories:
1. Staged Air Volume System (SAV™) for all models:
a. Evaporator fan motor:
(1.) Shall have permanently lubricated bearings.
(2.) Shall have a maximum continuous bhp rating for continuous duty operation; no safety factors above that rating.
(3.) Shall be Variable Frequency duty and 2-speed control. (4.) Shall contain motor shaft grounding ring to prevent electrical bearing fluting damage by safely diverting harmful shaft voltages and bearing currents to ground.
2. Two-Position Damper (factory-installed):
a. Damper shall be a two-position damper. Damper travel shall be from the full closed position to the field adjustable %-open setpoint.
b. Damper shall include adjustable damper travel from 25% to 100% (full open). c. Damper shall include single or dual blade, gear driven dampers and actuator motor. d. Actuator shall be direct coupled to damper gear. No linkage arms or control rods shall be acceptable.
e. Damper will admit up to 100% outdoor air for applicable rooftop units. f. Damper shall close upon indoor (evaporator) fan shutoff and/or loss of power. g. The damper actuator shall plug into the rooftop unit’s wiring harness plug. No hard wiring shall be required.
h. Outside air hood shall include aluminum water entrainment filter i. Not available with Staged Air Volume (SAV™) models.
3. Head Pressure Control Package (Motormaster®):
a. Controller shall control coil head pressure by condenser fan speed modulation or condenser fan cycling and wind baffles.
b. Shall c onsist of solid state control and condenser coil temperature sensor to maintain condensing temper ature between 90°F (32°C) and 110°F (43°C) at outdoor ambient temperatures down to –20°F (–29°C).
4. Condenser Coil Hail Guard Assembly:
a. Shall protect against damage from hail.
b. Shall be louvered design.
5. Unit-Mounted, Non-Fused Disconnect Switch:
a. Switch shall be factory-installed, internally mounted. b. National Electric Code (NEC) and UL approved non -fused switch shall provide unit power shutoff.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 22
c. Shall be accessible from outside the unit.
d. Shall provide local shutdown and lockout capability. e. Sized only for the unit as ordered from the factory. Does not accommodate field - installed devices.
6. Convenience Outlet:
a. Powered convenience outlet:
(1.) Outlet shall be powered from main line power to the rooftop unit. (2.) Outlet shall be powered from line side or load side of disconnect by installing contractor, as required by code. If outlet is powered from load side of disconnect, unit electrical ratings shall be ETL certified and rated for additional outlet amperage. (3.) Outlet shall be factory -installed and internally mounted with easily accessible 115-v female receptacle.
(4.) Outlet shall include 15 amp GFI receptacles with independent fuse protection. (5.) Voltage required to operate convenience outlet shall be provided by a factory - installed step down transformer.
(6.) Outlet shall be accessible from outside the unit.
(7.) Outlet shall include a field-installed “Wet in Use” cover. b. Factory-installed non-powered convenience outlet:
(1.) Outlet shall be powered from a separate 115-120v power source. (2.) A transformer shall not be included.
(3.) Outlet shall be factory -installed and internally mounted with easily accessible 115-v female receptacle.
(4.) Outlet shall include 15 amp GFI receptacles.
(5.) Outlet shall be accessible from outside the unit.
(6.) Outlet shall include a field-installed “Wet in Use” cover. c. Field-installed non-powered convenience outlet:
(1.) Outlet shall be powered from a separate 115-120v power source. (2.) A transformer shall not be included.
(3.) Outlet shall be field-installed and internally mounted with easily accessible 115- v female receptacle.
(4.) Outlet shall include 20 amp GFI receptacles. This kit provides a flexible installation method which allows code compliance for height requirements of the GFCI outlet from the finished roof surface as well as the capability to relocate the outlet to a more convenient location.
(5.) Outlet shall be accessible from outside the unit.
(6.) Outlet shall include a field-installed “Wet in Use” cover.
7. Thru-the-Base Connectors:
a. Kits shall provide connectors to permit electrical connections to be brought to the unit through the unit basepan.
b. Minimum of three connection locations per unit.
8. Propeller Power Exhaust:
a. Power exhaust shall be used in conjunction with an integrated economizer. b. Independent modules for vertical or horizontal return configurations shall be available.
c. Horizontal power exhaust shall be mounted in return ductwork.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 23
d. Power exhaust shall be controlled by economizer controller operation. Exhaust fans shall be energized when dampers open past the 0 -100% adjustable setpoint on the economizer control.
9. Roof Curbs (Vertical):
a. Full perimeter roof curb with exhaust capabi lity providing separate air streams for energy recovery from the exhaust air without supply air contamination. b. Formed galvanized steel with wood nailer strip and shall be capable of supporting entire unit weight.
c. Permits installation and securing of ductwork to curb prior to mounting unit on the curb.
10. High Static Indoor Fan Motor(s) and Drive(s):
High static motor(s) and drive(s) shall be factory -installed to provide additional performance range.
a. Thru-the-Bottom Utility Connectors:
Kit shall provide connectors to permit electrical connections to be brought to the unit through the basepan.
b. Outdoor Air Enthalpy Sensor:
The outdoor air enthalpy sensor shall be used to provide single enthalpy control.
When used in conjunction with a return air enthal py sensor, the unit will provide differential enthalpy control. The sensor allows the unit to determine if outside air is suitable for free cooling.
c. Return Air Enthalpy Sensor:
The return air enthalpy sensor shall be used in conjunction with an outdoor air enthalpy sensor to provide differential enthalpy control. d. Smoke detectors (Factory-Installed Only):
e. Shall be a four-wire controller and detector.
f. Shall be environmental compensated with differential sensing for reliable, stable, and drift-free sensitivity.
g. Shall use magnet activated test/reset sensor switches. h. Shall have tool-less connection terminal access.
i. Shall have a recessed momentary switch for testing and resetting the detector. j. Controller shall include:
(1.) One set of normally open alarm initiation contacts for connection to an initiating device circuit on a fire alarm control panel.
(2.) Two Form -C auxiliary alarm relays for interface with rooftop unit or other equipment.
(3.) One Form-C supervision (trouble) relay to control the operatio n of the Trouble LED on a remote test/reset station.
(4.) Capable of direct connection to two individual detector modules. (5.) Can be wired to up to 14 other duct smoke detectors for multiple fan shutdown applications.
11. Winter Start kit:
a. Shall contain a bypass device around the low-pressure switch. b. Shall be required when mechanical cooling is required down to 25°F (–4°C). c. Shall not be required to operate on an economizer when below an outdoor ambient of 40°F (4°C).
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 24
12. Time Guard:
a. Shall prevent compressor short cycling by providing a 5 minute delay (±2 minutes) before restarting a compressor after shutdown for any reason. b. One device shall be required per compressor.
13. Electric Heat:
a. Heating Section:
(1.) Heater element open coil resistance wire, nic kel-chrome alloy, 0.29 inches inside diameter, strung through ceramic insulators mounted on metal frame. Coil ends are staked and welded to terminal screw slots.
(2.) Heater assemblies are provided with integral fusing for protection of internal heater cir cuits not excee ding 48 amps each. Auto reset thermo limit controls, magnetic heater contactors (24V coil) and terminal block all mounted in electric heater control box (minimum 18 ga galvanized steel) attached to end of heater assembly.
14. Hinged Access Panels:
a. Shall provide easy access through integrated quarter turn latches. b. Shall be on major panels of: filters, control box, fan motor and compressor.
15. Display Kit for Variable Frequency Drive:
a. Kit allows the ability to access the VFD controller programs to provide special setup capabilities and diagnostics.
b. Kit contains display module and communication cable. c. Display kit can be permanently installed in the unit or used on any SAV™ system VFD controller as needed.
16. Condensate Overflow Switch:
a. This sensor and rela ted controller monitors the condensate level in the drain pan and shuts down compre ssion operation when overflow conditions occur. It includes:
(1.) Indicator light - solid red (more than 10 seconds on water contact - compressors disabled), blinking red (sensor disconnected). (2.) 10 second delay to break - eliminates nuisance trips from splashing or waves in pan (sensor needs 10 seconds of constant water contact before tripping). (3.) Disables the compressor(s) operation when condensate plug is detected, b ut still allows fans to run for economizer.
17. Exhaust Fans:
18. Roof Exhausters:
a. an shall be Greenheck, Loren Cook, or approved equal of size and capacity as called for on drawings.
b. Roof exhaust fans shall be of the centrifugal, direct driven type. Const ruction of the fan housing shall be of heavy gauge aluminum mounted upon a rigid support structure. The shroud shall have a rolled bead and internal structural members for added strength.
The fan wheel shall be of the aluminum backward -curved centrifugal type with an inlet venturi for maximum performance. Wheels shall be dynamically and statically balanced.
Motors and centrifugal wheels shall be mounted on vibration isolators. Motors shall be
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 25
isolated from the exhaust airstream. Air for cooling the motor sh all be taken into the motor compartment from a location free from contaminants. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Performance Ratings seal for both air and sound performance.
c. V-belt drive shall be as indicated on drawings, having rubber and fabric V -belt drives with horsepower ratings 150% of connected motor, cast -iron V -groove sheaves, adjustable motor sheave, full ball bearings mounted outside air stream, pre -lubricated motor, and drive and wheel assembly mounted on oil resistant rubber isolators. d. Normal horsepower rating shall be 110% of brake horsepower of fan. Motors shall be outside air stream. Motor shall be wired to approved horsepower rated disconnect switch located in motor compartment.
19. In-Line Fans:
a. Fan shall be factory assembled with square housing for in -line mounting in duct.
Fans shall be Greenheck or approved equal.
b. Wheel shall be backwardly inclined centrifugal type constructed of steel or aluminum that has been statically and dynamically balanced. c. The housing shall be constructed of formed steel, square shaped, with factory applied finish. One of the sides shall be hinged and shall support the motor and wheel assembly allowing the assembly to swing out for cleaning and inspection. d. Drive shall be belt type. Motor shall be open drip -proof type with inherent thermal protection. Provide belt guard.
e. Ratings shall be in accordance with the appropriate A.M.C.A. approved test codes and procedures and bear the A.M.C.A. certified rating seal.
19. Centrifugal Exhaust Fan:
a. Centrifugal fan shall include housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings and side support structure as a factory assembled unit. All sheet metal parts shall be cleaned, conditioned and painted with enameled primer finish prior to fin al assembly. A final coat of gray enamel shall be applied to all exterior surfaces after assembly. b. Fan shall be constructed to be capable of operating over the minimum pressure class limits as specified in A.M.C.A. Standard 2408-69.
c.Precisely positioned cutoffs and aerodynamically spun inlet cones shall provide smooth air flow through the fan with minimum turbulence.
d. Wheels shall be non~power~overloading with ten deep, backwardly inclined airfoil blades. Blades shall be securely welded to the spun rim and t o the hub plate. Hubs shall be close grained cast -iron or, on Class Ill, tried after assembly and dynamically balanced. Wheels shall be keyed to the shaft in all cases. e. Shafts shall be solid AISI C -i 040 or 1045 hot rolled steel accurately turned and
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 26
polished. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft makes contact with the bearings.
f. Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease lubricated, precision anti -friction ball or roller, self - aligning, pillow block type. Standard heavy -duty bearings shall be sele cted for a minimum average life (AFBMA L -50) in excess of 100,000 hours operation at maximum cataloged operating conditions.
g. Fan shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 and the Certified Ratings Program. They shall be licensed to bea r the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
h. Fan shall be manufactured by Trane Co., Greenheck, McQuay or approved equal.
20. Ceiling Exhaust Fans:
a. Ventilator shall have steel housing finished in baked enamel and insulated with at least ~/2” acoustic insulation. Housing shall have adjustable mounting brackets. b. Automatic Backdraft Damper shall be located within duct connector and shall have cushioned stops to prevent clatter. Damper/duct connector and wiring adapter plate shall be adjustable for either horizontal or vertical installation. c. Blower shall be removable and shall have a centrifugal blower type wheel. All motors are to be lifetime lubricated type, mounted with neoprene torsion mounts to isolate vibration. RPM not to exceed number listed for each model. d. Air Delivery shall be no less and sound levels no greater than listed for each model. All air and sound ratings shall be certified by AMCA. Units shall be UL listed.
21. Roof Upblast Fan:
1. Roof exhaust fans shall be belt drive upblast vertical discharge. Construct ion of housing shall be heavy gage aluminum. The fan wheel and inlet cone shall be aluminum and of the high performance, centrifugal blower type. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Construction shall include built -in grease drain. Motor and drives shall be isolated from the exhaust airstream. Air for cooling the motor shall be taken into the motor chamber by means of an air tube from a location free of discharge contaminates. The entire drive assembly and wheel, as a unit, shall be removab le through the support structure without dismantling the fan housing. The wheel shaft shall be mounted on heavy duty ball bearings. Drives shall be sized for 165% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be adjustable cast iron type keyed to the fan and motor s hafts. The entire drive assembly shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators. Fans shall be AMCA approved for sound and air performance.
22. Sidewall Fans:
a. Sidewall exhaust fans shall be of the centrifugal direct driven type. Construction of the windband shall be of heavy gauge aluminum and shall have a rolled bead.
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 27
b. The fan wheel shall be of the backward curved, centrifugal type with a well -designed inlet venturi for maximum performance. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced to assure minim al noise and vibration generation. Blades, fins, inlet cone and back plate shall be fabricated from aluminum and securely joined together. c. Motors and fan wheels shall be mounted on vibration isolators. Motors shall be isolated from the exhaust airstream. A ir for cooling the motor shall be taken into the motor compartment from a location free of contaminates. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance.
d. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Performance Rating Seal for both air and sound performance.
23. Axial Flow Fans:
a. Housing shall be 14-gauge steel with integral inlet bell and diffuser sections. b. Fan wheels shall be cast aluminum. Wheels shall be dynamically balanced and keyed to the fan shaft.
c. Diffusers shall be welded steel with airfoil straightening vanes. d. Fan shaft shall be A1S1 -Ci040 hot rolled steel. Bearings shall be flange - mounted, self-aligning, ball bearing type at inlet. Discharge bearings shall be pillow block ball type with tapered, double row spherical rollers. Grease lines shall extend to exterior of fan housing.
e. Fan shall be listed and rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 210. Fans shall be Trane or approved equal.
2.13 AUTOMATIC CONTROLS:
a. Air Conditioning system thermostats shall be California Energy code Title -24 complaint.
One (1) thermostat shall be provided per system or zone unless multiple thermostats are shown per system or zone on the plans. Thermostats shall be provided with (locking covers) and (remote temperature sensors)
b. Each Air Conditioning system shall have an automatic Condensate overflow Switch that will shut-off the Air Conditioning system if excessive condensate is detected. c. Fan System controlled by Thermostat shall have a Honeywell line -voltage Thermostat model T410 or equal.
d. Electrical Wiring: See paragraph 3.7 of this section. e. Smoke Detectors:
ii. The air duct smoke detector shall be of the photoelectronic type. iii. The detector housing shall be California State Fire Marshall listed (CASFM) and UL listed per UL268A, specifically for use in air handling systems. iv. The detector shall operate at air velocities of 100’ per minute to 4,000’ per minute. v. The detector shall be capable of local reset button or remote test switch (RTS).
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 28
vi. The duct detector housing shall incorporate an airtight smoke chamber in complian ce with UL268A, Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. vii. The housing shall be capable of mounting to either rectangular or round ducts without adaptor brackets.
viii. An integral filter system shall be included to reduce dust and residue effects on th e detector and housing, thereby, reducing maintenance and servicing. ix. Sampling tubes shall be either be plastic or be able to be installed after the housing is mounted to the duct by passing through the duct housing. x. The enclosure shall meet all applicable NEC and NFPA standards regarding the electrical junction boxes. Terminal connections shall be a strip and clamp method that is suitable for 12- 18 AWG wiring.
xi. Single or multiple systems supplying air in excess of 2,000 CFM shall be equipped with automatic shutoff. Automatic shutoff shall shut down the air -moving equipment then smoke is detected in the supply air. Detector shall be installed in the main supply duct or plenum.
2.14 MOTORS, DRIVES, GUARDS AND STARTERS:
a. Motors shall be built to the specificati ons of the National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). The motor shall be ball bearing, drip - proof, squirrel cage induction type for full voltage start, to operate at speeds not to exceed 1750 rpm except when indicated otherwise. The motors shall be Lincoln, Electro Dynamic, Sterling, or approved equivalent. Motors mounted outdoors shall have encapsulated windings and have weatherproof hood. The minimum service factor shall be 1 .15. b. Drives shall have one belt for units under 5 horsepower, at least 2 belts for units 5 horsepower to 25 horsepower, and 3 belts for units 25 horsepower and over. Belts shall be V -belt design sized for at least 150 percent of the motor horsepower. Motor pulleys shall be of the variable pitch up to 7 -1/2 horsepower and fix ed pitch type, 10 horsepower and larger. Pulleys shall be cast -iron with steel bushings. Provide additional new pulleys where required to drive fans at speeds necessary to give the indicated volumes.
Belts shall be Bates, B.F. Goodrich, Goodyear or equal. c. V-belt drives for the fans shall be properly protected by metal guards.
Guards shall be made of not less than 16 gauge expanded metal % -inch mesh, on an angle iron frame so as to securely close in the top, bottom and both sides of the drive. Ample allowan ce shall be made in guard for motor and belt adjustment. The guard shall be provided with openings so that the rpm of the fans may be obtained. Guards on equipment outside of building shall be of weatherproof design.
d. All guards shall be given a prime coat and one heavy coat of machinery gray enamel
e. All guards shall conform to California General Industrial Safety Order Requirements
f. Starters shall be reduced voltage “soft Start” for both motor starting and stopping, with overload protection on all legs. Star ters shall be complete
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 29
with NEMA Type I, enclosures with built -in “Hand-Off- Automatic” switch.
Starters exposed to weather shall have NEMA Type 4 enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. DUCTWORK:
A. Ductwork fabrication and installation shall conform to the recommend ation of the latest edition of the duct construction standards as published by the Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., (SMACNA). These standards shall govern type of seams and joints, reinforcing and supports, corner closures duct hangers, elbows, turning vanes (use double vane type), tapers offsets; streamliners, branches from mains, tee connections, volume dampers, access doors in ducts, fire damper installation, casings and housing. All unwrapped exposed ducts shall b e cross-broken; beading will not be acceptable. Ducts that are wrapped shall be cross-broken or beaded.
B. Volume dampers shall be caulked in the ducts to avoid bypass. Damper blade position on all dampers shall be indicated by filing a notch in the exposed operation rod or splitter damper rod. Volume control dampers shall be installed in all branch ducts, whether shown on drawings or not, to allow balancing of the system. Where damper frames and blades constitute an obstruction in excess of 15 percent of the duct area, the duct shall be increased in size to receive the damper.
C. All supply, return, and exhaust duct joints shall be sealed airtight with approved mastic.
D. All ductwork exposed to weather, regardless of system pressure classification, shall be sealed in accordance with Seal Class A, as referenced in SMACNA Standards. Sealant shall consist of Foil faced FG-701/Sealant System by HardCast.
3.2. PIPING INSTALLATION:
A. Refrigerant Piping: Cut pipe accurately to measure established at the site and work into place without springing or forcing. Install piping with sufficient flexibility for expansion and contraction due to temperature fluctuation inherent in its operation. Where pipe passes through building structure, pipe joints shall not be concealed, but located w here they may be readily inspected. Run all piping essentially as indicated and detailed on the plans, taking care to avoid interference with other piping, conduit or equipment. Run piping plumb and straight and parallel sleeves of suitable size for all li nes passing through building structure. Braze refrigerant piping with silver solder complying with AWS A5.8. The inside of tubing and fittings shall be free of flux. Clean the parts to be joined with emery cloth and keep hot until the solder has penetrated the full depth of the fitting and the extra flux has been expelled. Cool joints in air and remove flame marks and traces of flux. During the brazing operation, prevent an oxide film from forming on the inside of the tubing by slowly flowing dry nitrogen t o expel the air. Make provision to automatically return oil on halocarbon systems.
B. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves for all pipes and tubing which penetrate the building structure. Sleeves shall be securely retained in position and location before and du ring construction. Space between pipe and sleeves, shall be not less than V4” between outside of pipe and inside wall of sleeves. Pack the annular spaced with hemp or fiberglass, and seal with elastic cement. Sleeves for uninsulated pipes shall have ends
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 30
flush with finished wall surfaces and the pipe or tubing shall be provided as above, with outside perimeter of pipe caulked to the sleeve. Extend sleeves for lines passing through floors 3” above finished floor slab, and caulk to the slab. Provide lines pas sing through roof areas with necessary slashing and counterflashing to provide a water-tight roof seal.
C. Leak testing upon completion of installation of the air conditioning equipment, test all factory as well as field refrigerant piping with an electronic -type leak detector to acquire a leak-tight refrigerant system. If leaks are detected at the time of installation or during the guarantee period, remove the entire refrigerant charge from the system, correct the leaks and retest the system.
D. Evacuation, Dehy dration, and Charging: After system is found to be without leaks, evacuate the system using an electronic gage with range accurate to 10 microns and a vacuum pump capable of pulling a vacuum of at least 1 mm Hg absolute. Evacuate system in strict accordanc e with the triple -evacuation and blotter method or in strict accordance with equipment manufacturer’s printed instructions. System leak testing, evacuation, dehydration, and charging with refrigerant shall comply with ARI 260.
E. Kitchen Ventilation Systems:
F. Ducts and plenums serving Type 1 hoods shall be constructed of not less than No. 16 manufacturers standard gage steel for ducts 4 square -feet and less cross section area, and No. 14 gauge for ducts over 4 square-feet cross section area.
G. All duct joints and seams shall be made with a continuous grease tight weld or braze on the external surface.
H. Ducts shall be so constructed and installed that grease will not pocket in any portion thereof and shall slope not less than one quarter inch 1/4 -inch per lineal foot toward the hood or an approved grease reservoir. Where horizontal ducts exceed 75 feet in length, the slope shall be not less than 1-inch per lineal foot.
I. The duct system shall be so constructed as to permit cleaning of the entire system. Any portion, i naccessible from the entrance or discharge shall be provided with adequate cleanout openings of sufficient size and so located to effect such cleaning. Cleanout openings shall also be installed at each change of direction of the duct and be located on the sides of the duct. Cleanout openings shall be equipped with tightfitting metal doors of equal or greater thickness than the ducts, fitted with a substantial method of latching, and designed to be opened easily without the use of a tool.
J. Dishwashing machine exhaust ductwork shall be No. 304 stainless steel, minimum of No. 18 gauge, all welded. Flanged joints where necessary shall be sealed with Dow - Corning building sealant No. 780, or equal. Bracing and reinforcing shall be equal to that herein specified for rectangular galvanized sheet metal ductwork.
3.3. INSULATION INSTALLATION:
A. Insulate no piping or equipment until tested and approved for tightness. All piping shall be dry when insulated.
B. Ductwork Insulation:
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 31
1. Supply Air Ductwork Above Ceiling: Secure insulatio n to duct with mechanical fasteners on 18” centers or on underside of rectangular ducts over 30” wide. Seal all joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3” wide strips of the same facing material adhered with vapor barrier adhesive, Manville Z-Glue or approved equal, or 3” wide strips of white glass fabric, Manville Duramesh Fabric No. 206 or approved equal, coated with vapor barrier mastic, Foster 30 -35 or approved equal.
2. Return Air Ductwork Above Ceiling: The insulation shall be wrapped entirely around the duct with all joints lapped at least 2” and secured with 16-gauge galvanized wire on 12” centers. The insulation shall cover all surfaces including standing seams.
3. Ductwork Liner: The duct liner shall be applied with 100% cove rage of approved fire-resistant adhesive. On ducts over 20” wide or deep, the liner shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners on maximum 15” centers.
Fasteners shall start within 2” of the leading edge of each section and within the duct section. All exposed edges and the leading edge of all cross joints of the liner shall be heavily coated with an approved fire -resistant adhesive. The duct liner shall be cut to assure snug closing corner joints, the black surface of the liner shall face the air stream, transverse joints shall be neatly butted, and all damaged areas shall be heavily coated with an approved adhesive.
3.4. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:
A. The installation of all air conditioning equipment and exhaust fans shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction and installation book. All recommendations of manufacturer shall be followed, required clearances maintained, and factory approval secured for each installation. All equipment shall be securely fastened to its base. All parts of the installation shall be made weatherproof. A copy of the manufacturer’s installation and service manual shall be kept with each piece of equipment at all times to allow an inspector to determine if the installation meets requirements.
B. All work shall be performed by skilled mechanics, under the supervision of a competent foreman and in accordance with the best standards of practice of the trade.
3.5. ROOF AND WALL PENETRATIONS:
A. All penetrations of roof and exterior walls shall be flashed watertight with lea d or galvanized iron.
B. Flashing shall comply with requirements for flashing in Sheet Metal Section.
C. Pipe flashing shall be counterflashing sleeve type with 4 pound seamless lead flashing with 8” skirt. The joint shall be sealed with Permaseal water -proofing compound or equal.
3.6. IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT:
A. Equipment: Equipment shall be identified by stenciling the identification plainly (such as EF-1 as shown on equipment schedule) on the service side. Lettering to be minimum
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 32
size of 1”. This applies to fans, boiler, etc.
3.7. ELECTRICAL WORK:
A. Power voltage wiring and connections thereto and all power voltage conduit shall be furnished and installed under the Electrical Division of the specifications.
B. Low voltage and line voltage control wiring and connec tions thereto and all low and line voltage control conduit shall be furnished and installed under the Mechanical Sections of the specifications.
C. Relays, push button stations, control equipment, etc., shall be furnished under the Mechanical Section of the s pecifications, except as noted on the drawings. Check drawings closely for starters that will be furnished under the Electrical Division which will be in Motor Control Panels. Magnetic motor starters, except those furnished with packaged mechanical equipment, will be furnished under Mechanical Division.
D. Disconnect switches shall be furnished, installed and connected under the Electrical Division of the specification.
3.8. EARTHQUAKE RESTRAINT:
A. Provide a means to prohibit excessive motion of all mechanical equipm ent during an earthquake.
B. All mechanical equipment, both hanging and base mounted, shall be provided with mounting connection points of sufficient strength to resist lateral seismic forces equal to
0.5 of equipment operating weight.
3.9. SHOP PRIMING PROCEDURES:
A. Ferrous metal items, except items to be encased in concrete and areas adjacent to field welds shall be thoroughly cleaned and prime painted.
B. Surfaces shall be cleaned free of loose mill scale, loose rust, accessible weld slag or flux deposit, dirt and ot her foreign matter by hand wire brushing. Oil and grease deposits shall be removed by solvent.
C. After cleaning, surfaces shall be given one shop coat of prime paint applied thoroughly and evenly to dry surfaces. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erect ion shall be given an additional shop coat of slightly different color than first coat.
D. After erection, rough up with prime paint all members where shop coat has been damaged, welds and area adjacent to welds and field bolts.
3.10. TEST AND BALANCE:
A. The Contract or shall furnish all labor, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to air and water systems testing and balancing.
B. Include an extended warranty of one year after final acceptance by Owner, during which time the Owner may request a recheck or r esetting of any outlet, coil or device listed in
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 33
the test report. Provide technicians to assist in making any test or adjustment required.
C. Contractor shall at his own expense, procure the service of an independent air balance and testing agency approved by the Owner, which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems, to balance, adjust and test all air moving equipment, air distribution systems and exhausting systems as herein specified. All instruments used by this agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. If requested, the test shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner and/or his representative.
D. Air balance and testing shall not begin until system has been completed a nd is in full working order. The Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment in full operation and shall continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. The Contractor shall subm it, within fifteen (15) days after receipt of Contract, one copy of submittal data for the testing and balancing of the air conditioning, heating and ventilating systems. The air balance agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and scope and shall be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council and/or National Environmental Balancing Bureau and/or Testing Adjusting & Balancing Bureau (TABB) unless otherwise approved.
E. Test and balance agen cy shall include an extended warranty of ninety (90) days after completion of test and balancing work, during which time the Owner, at his discretion, may request a recheck or resetting of any outlet, supply air fan, or exhaust fan as listed in test report. The agency shall provide technicians to assist the Engineer in making any test he may require during this period of time. Commissioning agent shall conduct “spot checks” on air distribution to verify air balancing.
F. The Air Conditioning Contractor shall a ward the test and balance Contract to the approved agency upon receipt of his Contract to proceed with air conditioning installation, to allow the air balance agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other trades involved and comply with the completion date.
G. Upon completion of the air conditioning system, the air balance agency shall perform the tests, compile the test data, and submit in electronic, Portable Document Format (PDF) the complete test data to the Contractor for forwarding to the Owners for evaluation and approval.
3.11. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A. The Contractor shall provide in electronic, Portable Document Format (PDF) The following shall be included in the Manual.
1. Identification: The Manual shall include the names, addresses and tel ephone numbers of each Sub-Contractor installing equipment and systems and of the local representative for each major item of equipment.
2. Index: The Manual shall have a Table of Contents and information shall be assembled with tab sheets to conform to the Table of Contents.
3.12. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
233000 (A)- 34
A. Manufacturer’s Literature: Manufacturer’s instructions for operation and maintenance of all mechanical equipment, including replacement parts list.
B. Written Instruction: Typewritten instructions for operation and maintenance of the system composed of Operation Instruction, Maintenance Instructions and Maintenance Schedule.
C. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: A brief description of the system indicating proper setting of switches and other equipmen t shall be furnished for the purpose of providing control of the system and its components by the operator.
D. Maintenance Schedule: A list of each item of equipment requiring maintenance, showing all the components of each item of equipment, and the month of the year (service schedule) when each item or component of equipment should be inspected or serviced, as recommended and scheduled by the manufacturers.
E. Verbal Instructions: Upon completion of the work, and at a time designated by the Owner, a competent Engineer from each supplier of major items or equipment shall be furnished to instruct the Owner’s representative in the operation and maintenance of the equipment supplied by his company.
F. Electronic files: A complete set of the above data along with cont rol diagrams as installed, sequence of operations, complete catalog data, calibration information, spare parts lists, etc., for all control equipment shall be placed in electronic, Portable Document Format (PDF) files identification section and index. Prov ide three complete electronic, Portable Document Format (PDF) copies deliver to the Owner.
1. Manufacturer’s Literature: Include Manufacturer’s literature for all mechanical equipment. All equipment shall be identified by make, model and serial number.
Electrical characteristics shall be noted. A complete parts list shall be included.
2. Operating Instructions: Provide a brief description of the system including proper setting of switches and other equipment. This may be provided as a part of the manufacturer’s literature. If included in literature provide an index indicating on what page each item is located. Adjustments requiring the technical knowledge of the service agency personnel need not be included.
3. Maintenance Instructions: Provide a list of each item o f mechanical equipment requiring inspection, lubrication or service with a description of the schedule and performance of such maintenance including types of lubricant for each item of equipment. This may be provided as a part of the Manufacturer’s Literat ure. If included in literature provide an index indicating on what page each item is located.
4. Controls: Provide system control in electronic, Portable Document Format (PDF) including complete catalog data, calibration information, spare parts lists, etc. A sequence shall be included with the diagram referring to component numbers or designations hereon.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1
Syska Hennessy Group
SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section covers and applies to all work specified in Division 26 (and 27 & 28).
B. Work Included: Materials, equipment, fabrication, installation and tests for fully operational and safe systems, including all necessary materials, appurtenances and features w hether specified or shown on drawings or not, in conformity with applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction for the following:
1. Electrical work specified in all sections within D ivision 26 (and 27 & 28) of these specifications, including, but not limited to:
a. Lighting and power distributi on fa cilities, including , with metering, distribution boards, panelboards with feeders, motor contro ls, branch circuit wiring, connections to outlets, and wiring devices.
b. Lighting fixtures and lamps.
c. Motor and ot her power-consuming equipment connections from motor control lers or distribution apparatus to equipment.
d. Control, alarm and interlock wiring for mechanical equipment, where indicated. e. Electrical grounding system.
f. Emergency power distribution and lighting system.
g. Vibration and seismic controls for electrical systems. h. Life safety system including ADA requirements.
i. Excavation, backfilling and compacting for the Electrical Work. j. Cutting and patching for the Electrical Work.
k. Adjustment and testing of the Electrical Work.
l. Examine the drawings and specif ications of other Divisions and provide electrical service for all equipment, devices and controls noted therein, unless work specifically is not included.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS
A. Specifications:
1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment.
2. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences.
3. Words or phrases such as "The Contractor shall," "shall be ," "furnish," provide," "a," "an," "the," and "all" etc. have been omitted for brevity.
B. Drawings:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 2
Syska Hennessy Group
1. Electrical layouts are generally diagrammatic and, alt hough size and location of equipment is drawn to scale wherever possibl e, Contractor shall make use of a ll data in Contract Documents and verify this information at building site.
2. Locations of items on t he drawings may be distorted for purposes of clearnes s and legibility. Actual locations of architectural and mechanical ite ms are shown on architectural and mechanical drawings.
3. Contractor shall adjust locations of light fixtures in mechanical rooms to compensate for changes in duct routing, to provide reasonably uniform lighting in work areas.
4. Outlets shall be located in acco rdance with architectural design, and specific locations may be determined by Owner's representative at jobsite prior to installation.
5. Outlets located on architectural plans by dimension shall be held. Additional outlets may be shown on electrical plans a nd shall be installed as close as practical to the location shown.
6. Manufacturers' drawings and instructions shall be followed i n all cases where the makers of devices and equipment furn ish directions, where details are not shown on the drawings, or where described in the specifications.
7. Work installed in a manner contrary to that shown in the c ontract documents shall be removed an d rei nstalled when so directed by the Architect. Discrepa ncies and questionable points shall be immediately reported to the Architect for clarification.
8. The Owne r and the Architect reserve the ri ght to make reasonable changes in outlet locations in each area prior to roughing-in at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. If any part of specifications or drawings appears unclear or contrad ictory, apply to Architect for his interpretation and decision as e arly as possible, inclu ding during bidding period. Do not proceed with such work without Architect's decision.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Examine all drawings and specifications in a manner to be full y cognizant of all work required under this Division.
B. Adjoining work of other Divisions sh all be examined for interferences and conditions affecting this Division.
C. Examine site related work and surfaces before starting work of any Section.
1. Report to Archit ect, in writing, conditions which will prevent proper provision of this work.
2. Beginning wo rk of any Section without reporting u nsuitable conditions to Architect constitutes acceptance of conditions by Contractor.
3. Perform any required removal, repair or rep lacement of this work caused by u nsuitable conditions at no additional cost to Owner.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. “Provide": To furnish, install and connect complete and ready for safe and regular operation of particular work referred to unless specifically otherwise noted.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 3
Syska Hennessy Group
B. "Install": To erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories.
C. “Furnish” or "Supply": To purchase, procure, acquire an d deliver complete with related accessories.
D. "Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories and other items required for proper and complete installation.
E. "Wiring": Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.
F. "Concealed": Em bedded in masonry or other construction, installed in fur red spaces, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces or in enclosures.
G. "Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.
H. "Indicated" "Shown" or "Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on drawings or specifications.
I. "Equal": Equal in quality, workmanship, materials, weight, size, design and efficien cy of specified product, conforming with "Manufacturers".
J. "Reviewed," "Satisfactory," "Accepted," or "Di rected": As reviewed, satisfactory, accepted or directed by or to Architect.
K. "Motor Controlle rs": Manual or magnetic starters (with or without switche s), individual pushbuttons, or hand-off-automatic (HOA) switches controlling the operation of motors.
L. "Control Devices": Automatic sensing and switching devices such as thermostats, pressure, float, electro-pneumatic switches and electrodes controlling operation of equipment.
1.6 UTILITY CONNECTIONS
A. Finalize electrical service arrangements including verificatio n of locations and details with the Serving Agency.
B. Verify locations of facilities and details with the Telephone Utility.
1. Final telephone service arrangements will be made by the Owner.
C. In addition to the requirements shown on the drawings and stated herein, the work shall comply with the following:
1. Construction Standards and Service Requirements of the respective utilities including any supplementary drawings issued by the utilities.
2. Be subjected to inspection approval of these utilities.
A. Electrical servi ce facilities shall consist of furnishing and installing concrete encased primary conduits, switchgear and transformer pads and secondary service includ ing utility meter in accordance wi th the arrangement, det ails, and locations shown on the drawings and described herein and as required by the utility company.
1.7 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
A. Service: 480/277 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire with grounded neutral.
B. Lighting (LED), 277 volts.
C. Motors ½ horsepower and above: 480 volts, 3 phase.
D. Fractional horsepower motors less than ½ horsepower: 120 volts single phase.
E. General receptacles will be supplied at 120 volts.
1.8 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 4
Syska Hennessy Group
A. Mounting heights of devices and equipment shown on the architectural drawings shall go vern, but in the absence of such indications, the follow ing centerline heights above the finished floor shall be maintained.
1. Wall switches 3 feet - 6 inches (or as directed by
architect).
2. Wall lights (interior) 7 feet - 0 inches (or as directed by architect).
3. Pendant or chain hung fixture 10 feet - 0 inches (or as directed by architect).
4. Convenience receptacles 1 foot - 3 inches except in Toilets and over cabinets or -counters where d evices shall
be mounted at 4 feet - 0 inches (9 inches
above counter).
5. Fire alarm stations 4 feet - 0 inches.
6. Telephone and communication outlets 1 foot - 3 inches.
7. Clock outlets 1 foot - 6 inches below finished ceiling.
8. Panelboard cabinets Shall be installed with the top 6 feet - 6 inches above t he floor fo r cabinets more
than 2 feet - 6 inches high and 6 feet - 0
inches for cabinets less th an 2 fe et - 6
inches high.
9. Motor controllers 5 feet-0 inches.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples and certificates of compliance requir ed by contract documents.
1. See Submittals paragraph in Division 1.
B. Submit no later than 30 days after signing of Contract:
1. Complete schedule of submittals for equipment and layout shop drawings.
2. Submittals schedule shall be in such sequence as to cause no d elay in work or in work of any other division.
C. Corrections or comments made on th e shop drawings during review do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. Shop COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 5
Syska Hennessy Group
drawing checking by the Engineer is onl y for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and ge neral complianc e w ith t he information given in the co ntract documents. The Contractor is responsible for:
1. Confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions.
2. Fabrication processes and techniques of construction.
3. Work with all other trades.
4. Work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
5. Equipment that can be installed in the available space with all code clearances , prior to ordering any equipment.
D. Quantity of Submittals Required:
1. Layout Shop Drawings:
a. Submit one reproducible transparency and one print.
b. Upon review, transparency will be annotated and returned. Print will be retained by Engineer.
c. Copies of this transparency will serve as record copies for Architect and Engineer. d. Additional prints will not be reviewed nor returned.
2. Product data (brochures):
a. Submit six copies of product data.
b. Five copies will be returned.
c. If comments are required, comment sheet(s) will be returned with each copy. d. One copy will be retained by the Engineer.
3. Samples:
a. Submit as directed by the architect and as required in each specification section.
E. Submittal Format:
1. Number each submittal in consecutive order.
2. Submit minimum one binder for each specific section. Different specification sections shall not be combined within same binder.
3. In each submittal include complete index with the following information:
a. Project title and number.
b. Submittal number.
c. Referenced specification DIVISION, Section, Title, paragraph and page number or drawing reference as applicable and flap each applicable item. d. Date of submission.
e. Referenced addendum or change order number as applicable. f. Names of Contractor, supplier and manufacturer.
g. Description of item.
h. Stamp with Contractor's initials or signed certifying:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 6
Syska Hennessy Group
1) Review of submittal.
2) Verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria. 3) Coordination of shop drawing and/or information in submittal with requirements of work of this Division and other divisions of Co ntract Documents.
4. Nomenclature, legend, symbols and abbreviations on submitted material shall be same as used in contract documents.
F. Resubmission Requirements:
1. Make any corrections or change in submittals required. Resubmit only items required for resubmittal for review until no exceptions are taken or a resubmission is not required.
2. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
a. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. b. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested. c. Provide written response of all previous comments with the resubmittals.
3. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
4. Clearly identify resubmittal by original submittal date, number and revision nu mber and- indicate all changes from previous submittal.
G. Substitutions:
1. In the event of conflict, the provisions of this paragraph shall override those contained in SUBMITTALS and SUBSTITUTIONS paragraphs in DIVISION 1.
2. As a general, substitutions are not acceptable except for hereafter condition:
a. Requests for substitutions shall be considered only in case of product unavailability. Product unavailability shall be verified in writing by manufacturer. b. Submit separate request for each substitution at appropriate time thereafter in the event of non-availability of item included in bid. Support each request with:
1) Complete data substant iating compliance of propos ed substitution with requirements stated in Contract documents.
2) Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
3) Any effect of substitution on other Work in this and other D ivisions, a nd any other related contracts, and changes required in other work or products. c. Contractor shall be responsible at no extra cost to Owner for any changes resulting from proposed substitutions which affect work of other Sections or Divisions, or related contracts.
d. Substitute products shall not be or dered or installed without prior acceptance by Architect.
e. Architect will have sole discretion to determine acceptability of proposed substitutions and reserves the right to reject any such substitution. f. Approval o f substitutions shall not relieve Contracto r from full compliance with requirements of Contract documents.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 7
Syska Hennessy Group
H. Layout Shop Drawings Required:
1. Prepare and submit following coordinated layout shop drawings on 1/4” scale:
a. Mechanical equipment rooms containing motor control center and/or transformers. b. All electrical rooms and closets with equipment dimensions. c. Areas requiring deviations from design documents. Such deviations shall be clearly identified.
2. Layout drawings not varying from design documents shall not be submitted and will not be reviewed.
I. Operating Instructions, Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists.
1. Before requesting acceptance of work submit one set for review by Architect.
2. After review, furnish five printed and bound sets.
3. Include:
a. Manufacturer's nam e, m odel number, service manual, spare -parts list, and descriptive lit erature for all components, cross referenced and numbered on Reference Drawings.
b. Maintenance instructions.
c. Listing of possible breakdown and repairs.
d. Instruction for starting, operation and programming. e. Detailed and simplified one line and wiring diagrams. f. Field test report.
g. Name, address and phone number of contractors, equipment suppliers and service agencies.
h. Assemble manufacturer's equipment manuals in chronological order f ollowing the specification alpha-numeric system in hea vy duty three -ring binders clearly titled on the spine and front cover.
J. Record Drawings:
1. Submit to Architect for review prior t o final acceptance inspection, one complete marked-up set of reproducible drawings.
2. Submit to Architect for review prior to final acceptance inspection, one complete set of reproducible engineering design drawings on electronic files using ACAD and one vellum set.
a. Fully illustrate all revisions made by all trades.
b. Include all f ield chang es, adjustments, variances, substitutions and deletions, including all changes made by Change Orders.
c. Exact location, type and function of all equipment.
3. These drawings shall be for record purposes for Owner's use and are not considered Shop Drawings.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 8
Syska Hennessy Group
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconn ecting the equipment with m inimum interference to other installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So that connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busw ays will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast -in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate location of access panels an d doors for electrical item s tha t a re behi nd finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and appli cation with selection and application of fi restopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."." PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). b. For sleeve cross -section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more s ides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 9
Syska Hennessy Group
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.
Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with cor rosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.3 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Gr out: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmet allic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonst aining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to cen ter of unit for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indi cated, arrange, and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and ot her nearby installa tions. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
F. Layout and installation of electrical wo rk shall be coordin ated with the o verall constructio n schedule and work schedules of various trades, to prevent delay in completion of the Project.
1. Complete drawings and specifications for the entire project w ill be available at the Project site.
2. It shall be obligatory to thoroughly check these drawings before organizing the electrical work schedule, or installing material and equipment.
G. Dimensions and information regarding accurate locations of equipment, and structural limitations and finish shall be coor dinated and verifie d wi th other Di vision of Work. B e prepared to promptly furnish dimensions a nd information regarding electrical Work t o other trades and cooperate with them to secure harmony and the best progress of the Project.
H. The drawings do not show off-sets, bends, a nd s pecial fitt ings, or junction or pull boxes necessary to meet job conditi ons. These items shall be provided as req uired at no additional cost to the Owner.
I. Accessibility and Clearance:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 10
Syska Hennessy Group
1. Electrical equipment, outlets, junction and pull boxes shall be ins talled in acces sible locations, a voiding obstructions, preserving headroom, and keeping openings and passageways clear.
2. Minor adjustments in the locations of equipment shall be made where ne cessary, providing such adjustments do not adversely affect functioning of the equipment.
J. Scaffolds and staging for installation of electrical work shall be provided under the work of this Division.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wir eways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and W alls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1. Promptly pack grout solidly bet ween sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space betwee n sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partition s, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install slee ves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop m aterials. Com ply with requireme nts in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast -iron pipe sleeves. Size s leeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by m anufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mech anical sleeve COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 11
Syska Hennessy Group
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sl eeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire -resistance r ating of as sembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 WEATHERPROOF EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical devices or equipment located in damp, semi -exposed areas shall be weather-resistant.
Enclosure shall comply with NEMA Type 3R requirements.
B. Surface mounted outlet boxes shall be ca st metal with threaded hubs. Pull or junction boxes shall be cast metal with bolted and gasketed covers.
C. Outlet box c overs shall be of a suitable weath erproof type with gaskets, packing glands, weatherproof doors, or other required means to prevent entry of moisture.
D. Lighting fixtures shall be installed with suitable gasket, and UL labeled for location.
3.6 HOUSEKEEPING PADS AND FOUNDATIONS
A. Concrete work req uired f or housekee ping pads and foundations will be provided b y General Construction Work. Comply with the requirement for concrete base specified in Division 03 section.
1. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28 -day compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for anchoring equipment to the concrete base.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use sup ported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, di agrams, i nstructions, and directions furnished with it ems to be embedded.
5. Bolt equipment to channel-iron sills embedded in concrete bases. Install sil ls level and grout flush with floor or base.
6. Refinish damaged or scratched surfaces.
7. Tighten all bolted connections prior to energizing.
8. Provide fuse cabinet with specified number of fuses of each type.
9. Provide special tools as required for routing maintenance and inspection.
10. Maximum extension of equipment pad in front of electrical equipment is 6 inches.
B. Furnish req uired dimensional drawings and specify locations. Minimum height of housekeeping pa ds shall be 4 inches and shall extend out 6 inches from th e footprint of the equipment.
C. Furnish anchor bolts and sleeves, and verify accuracy of installation.
D. Provide for:
1. Switchboards and floor mounted ATS.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 12
Syska Hennessy Group
2. Standby power distribution equipment.
3. Floor mounted transformers.
4. Outdoor light fixture standards.
5. All other floor mounted equipment.
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES 26 05 19 - 1
Syska Hennessy Group
SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables"
2. Section 260533 “ Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
3. Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials.
B. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association.
C. IEEE: Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers.
D. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
E. NETA ATS: International Electrical Testing Association - Acceptance Testing Specification.
F. VFC: Variable frequency controller.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data f or each type of product, indicating conductor/cable construction, insulation material, thickness of insulation, jacket, cable stranding, and voltage rating of each type of conductor/cable specified, splices and terminations.
Indicate date and place of manufacture for each conductor/cable, cable, splice and termination.
B. Manufacturer’s ISO certification.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Independent Testing Agency.
A. Field quality-control reports. Perform field testing of cables per para 3.8. Submit six (6) copies of field test reports to owner’s representative within two (2) weeksof completion of test.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES 26 05 19 - 2
Syska Hennessy Group
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General Requirements: The low voltage power conductors and cable shall be copper, minimum 600V rated unless otherwise indicated. Aluminum conductors and cables shall not be accepted unless otherwise indicated.
B. Materials and installation shall meet or exceed requirements in the foll owing referenced standards and shall be listed and labelled by UL.
1. ICEA S-93-639/ NEMA WC 74.
2. AEIC CS8.
3. UL 1072.
4. IEEE.
5. ASTM.
6. NEMA.
C. Conductors and cables shall be of the same manufacturer , and shipped to the job site in original unbroken reels.
D. Conductors and cables shall be manufactured with in twelve (12) months of installation. Date of manufacture shall be clearly marked on conductors or conductor reels.
E. Manufacturer shall have minimum ten (10) years’ experiencein the manufacturer of conductors and cables similar to those specified on this project.
F. Manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 and ISO 9002 certification.
G. All conductors and cables shall be new and supplied by a local distributor.
H. American made conductors and cables have been acceptab le. If non -domestic product is submitted, notice is hereby given that extensive testing shall be required to insure quality and conformance to the Specifications. All of the testing procedures and results shall be satisfactory to the Owner’s representative. The Contracto r shall bear all costs for testing and shall be responsible for all costs associated with travel, lodging, etc. for the Owner’s Representative to witness the test at the manufacturer’s testing facility. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner at $1,200 per man day or part thereof for the time required to witness the testing.
I. Testing: Provide the services of a n independent qualified testing laboratory to perform the specified field test s. Notify the University's Representative fourteen (14) days in advan ce of performance of work requiring testing.
J. Conductors, cables, splices and terminations shall be manufactured within twelve (12) months of installation. Each item shall have a permanen t marking on the product or the original manufacturers’ package indicating the date of manufacture unless otherwise noted.
K. Testing Agency Qualifications:
1. Testing agency shall be an independent company; shall have been a member of NETA for a minimum of last ten (10) years and has permanent in -house testing engineers and technicians involved with testing of low voltage electrical power conductors and cables similar to those specified on this project.
2. Testing company shall be located with 50 miles radius of the project.
3. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
4. Field Testing technician and supervisor shall have minimum ten (10) years’ experiencein field testing of low voltage power conductors and cables of the type and rating similar to the conductors and cables to be tested on this project.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES 26 05 19 - 3
Syska Hennessy Group
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers: Subj ect to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:
1. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
2. Okonite
3. Southwire Incorporated
4. Alpha Wire.
5. Belden Inc.
6. Encore Wire Corporation.
B. Conductor Material: Electrical grade, soft drawn annealed copper, 98 percent conductivity, and fabricated in accor dance with ASTM and IPCEA standard s. Mini mum size is number 12 for branch circuits, number 14 stranded for control wiring. Aluminum conductors are not permitted. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
C. Conductor Insul ation: Comply wit h NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2- THWN-2.
D. Metal Clad, Multi Conduct or Cable (Type MC Cable): Type MC steel metal clad cable with galvanized steel armor with type THHN/THW N insulated copper wire (min #12 AWG) with integral green ground wire. UL Standard 1569, UL1685, UL 83.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subjec t t o compliance with requ irements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:
1. Ideal Industries, Inc.
2. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation.
3. NSi Industries LLC.
4. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.
5. 3M; Electrical Markets Division.
6. Tyco Electronics.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
C. Copper conductors shall be te rminated in copper or bronze mechanical connectors or lugs or tool applied compression connections made of copper for all connections except those on wiring devices.
D. Splices in wires No. 10 and smaller shall be made with twist -on splicing connector in accordance with UL486 -C. Connections in wires No. 8 and larger shall be made with compression type connectors in acco rdance with UL486-A and wrapped with insulated tape in accordance with UL501. Insulating tape shall be applied in a minimum of two layers of half wrap or built to match the overall insulation of the wire.
E. Splices in underground pu ll boxes shall be made submersible type an d made using “3M” Scotch-cast epoxy kits.
F. Pressure type connectors are not permitted.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES 26 05 19 - 4
Syska Hennessy Group
2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Component s, Devices, and Accessories: UL Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; st randed for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLI CATIONS
AND WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspac es: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concr ete, below Slabs -on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2- THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Cir cuits, Including in Crawl spaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Cei lings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on-Grade, and Undergro und:
Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
H. Cord Drops and Portable Ap pliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless - steel, wire-mesh, and strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
I. The use of Type MC cable shall be permitted from J-box in ceilings to end use devices in walls such as receptacles and light switches only.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. All conductors and cables shall be installed in a raceway.
B. Before installing conductors and cables in existing conduits, verify the continuity of each conduit; each surface conduit is properly supported per code and clear of any debris.
C. Complete rac eway ins tallation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.
D. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compou nd used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
E. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cabl e, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.
F. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES 26 05 19 - 5
Syska Hennessy Group
G. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." H. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and termina ls according to manufacture r's published torque - tightening va lues. I f manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices , term inations, and taps that are com patible with conductor material and that possess eq uivalent or better mechanic al strength and insulation ratings than un spliced conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each conductor shall be factory color coded by conductor manufacturer. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare condu ctor at each end with identity num ber and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALL ATION FOR ELECTRICAL
PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assem blies. Comply with requirements i n Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire -resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 " Penetration Firestopping."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a n independent qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circ uitry has been energized, test service entrance conductors, feeder conductors.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test s stated in latest NETA Acceptance Testing Specification section 7.3.2 (Inspection and Test Procedures -Cables, Low Voltage -600V Maximum) . Certify comp liance with test parameters per NET A tables.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES 26 05 19 - 6
Syska Hennessy Group
3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 da ys after Final Acceptance, perform an infr ared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.
Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.
a. Follow-up Infrared Scan ning: Perform an additional follo w-up inf rared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an in frared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provid e calibration record for device.
c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describ es scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Procedures used.
2. Results that comply with requirements. Include color scan images.
3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1
Syska Hennessy Group
SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Gene ral and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
3. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface rac eways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
2. Laboratory Test Report s for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic E missions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
D. Samples: For wireways and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2
Syska Hennessy Group
1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certific ation is based and their installation requirements.
4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and intercon nections on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
D. Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
4. Electri-Flex Company.
5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc.
7. Republic Conduit.
8. Robroy Industries.
9. Southwire Company.
10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.
B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.
E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit].
1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3
Syska Hennessy Group
G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.
2. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Setscrew or compression.
3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
4. Coating for Fittings for PVC -Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corp.
6. Condux International, Inc.
7. Electri-Flex Company.
8. Kraloy.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.
11. RACO; a Hubbell company.
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and mark ed for intended location and application.
C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.
D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.
H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4
Syska Hennessy Group
I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.
J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice f or the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman; a Pentair company.
3. Mono-Systems, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Sheet metal, compl ying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, a nd other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 INNERDUCT INSIDE PLANT
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Carlon Industries
2. ENDOT Industries Inc.
3. Anixiter Wire and Cable
4. Midsouth Wire and Cable
5. Or approved equal.
B. General requirements for innerduct shall be UL listed for application and sh all be plenum rated for use in return air plenums.
C. Inneduct shall comply with ASTM F2160.
2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 5
Syska Hennessy Group
1. Adalet.
2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
3. EGS/Appleton Electric.
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
5. FSR Inc.
6. Hoffman; a Pentair company.
7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.
8. Kraloy.
9. Milbank Manufacturing Co.
10. Mono-Systems, Inc.
11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
12. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
13. Robroy Industries.
14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries.
16. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
17. Wiremold / Legrand.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, de signed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of lumin aires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comp ly with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.
I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
J. Gangable boxes are allowed.
K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor applications and Type 3R for outdoor applications with continuous -hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage (below 8 feet in equipment and storage rooms) GRC.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6
Syska Hennessy Group
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
7. All fiber optic cables shall be installed in innerduct.
B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. PVC Externally Coa ted, Rigid Steel Conduits: Us e only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.
D. Install nonferrous co nduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirement s except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Comply with requiremen ts in Section 260529 "Hangers and S upports for El ectrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 -degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support w ithin 12 inches of changes in direction.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, D amp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 7
Syska Hennessy Group
J. Coat field -cut threads on PV C-coated raceway with a corrosion -preventing conduct ive compound prior to assembly.
K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
M. Install raceways square to the enclosure and termina te at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
P. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Us e polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
Q. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box w ith a blank cover plate having a fini sh similar to that of adjacent plat es or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
R. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locat e seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of r efrigerated spaces.
2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
S. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
T. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperatur e change may exceed 30 deg F and that has str aight-run length that exceed s 25 feet .
Install in each run of aboveground RMC[ conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight -run length that exceed s 100 feet .
2. Install type and quantity of fitt ings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations No t Exposed to Dir ect Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 8
Syska Hennessy Group
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits . Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations w here conduits cross building or str ucture expansion joints.
5. Install each expansion -joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
U. Flexible Conduit Conne ctions: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
V. Mount bo xes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center [of box unless otherwise indicated.
W. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
X. Horizontally separat e boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.
Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structu re. Do not support boxes by conduits.
BB. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
CC. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRIC AL
PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 9
Syska Hennessy Group
2. Repair da mage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 05 44 - 1
Syska Hennessy Group
SECTION 26 05 44 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Sleeve-seal fittings.
4. Grout.
5. Silicone sealants.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestoppi ng" for penetration firestopping installed in fire - resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and pro duct requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 05 44 - 2
Syska Hennessy Group
2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tub e closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
2. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross -section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more side s larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. CALPICO, Inc.
c. Metraflex Company (The).
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Proco Products, Inc.
f. Or equal.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion -resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sle eve-type, waterstop assembly made f or embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 05 44 - 3
Syska Hennessy Group
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturer:
a. Pre-sealed Systems.
b. Or equal.
2.4 GROUT
A. Description: Non shrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non -fire- rated walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post -hardening and volume -adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single -component, silicone -based, neutral -curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for op enings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.
2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 550 g/L or less when ca lculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for t he Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone -based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above -Grade Non -Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry -Unit Floors and Walls:
1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a. Seal annular space betw een sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
b. Seal space outside of sleeves with morta r or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 05 44 - 4
Syska Hennessy Group
2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
3. Size pipe sleeves to provide [1/4-inch (6.4-mm)] annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings are used. Inst all sleeves during erection of wall s. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetratio n arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrat ions: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to al low for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install PVC Coated cast-iron pipe sleeves.
Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clea r space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs -on-grade at raceway entries into building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and si ze. Position raceway or cable in c enter of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.